Home

LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP Troubleshooting Manual

1. 4 3 l 2 l 1 Fuser unit Fuser output sensor Laser scanner unit Ps2 ZOE TH1 TH2 Scanner ve DEE motor sj J M3 g ON F Rear door 412 Lt I Fuser motor Main motor a 41214 CST MPT J24H bees EB si9 M8002 M8003 m Pssoo1 pickup pickup 380101 3 1 atk solenoid solenoid J24 CECCEE L 2 5 J18H Pond E FUE SL2 S41 Ja pes 38002 8001 k SL SL EPEELFEELE IREELEEEE 280101 g J8010D g W oj o Oj 9 x o oj ol de Q S loa g g dd gg ol o 2 a 3 ag S Jol Tal S o oS da S Oo S S 4 elo El S gt gt 4 alo gt S 4 al ol ol S Ol ol 2 ol 2 2 gt b amp al g oj a a 9 S l a 3 8 2 2 2 z amp amp 3 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 Oo Ol amp o S z9 9 5 se 9 5 9 5 f F T H E t amp g o FFL SL 2 2 oo o x o F o 2 9 F 2 GA PPEeEEEEPEY sF llb be rI GeEEEEPCEYI IRS ESEARSESESESERES E J2310 J2311 J2400 J2102 J2103 J2104 J9997 C r3 Test print switch 2 2l sw2100 DC Controller bids 3 2 1 5 62 2 J2100 J2200 J2201 2304 J2308 J2105 CECCELCC CELLET
2. High voltage power supply Theory of operation Laser scanner system Image formation system Pickup feed and delivery system Accessory ENWW Motors fans clutches solenoids switches and sensors Figure 1 3 Motors Fuser motor gt lt ee Table 1 2 Motors Description Main motor M8001 Fuser motor M8002 ENWW Components driven Pickup roller Feed roller Transfer roller Photosensitive drum Developing roller Duplex repickup roller Pressure roller Delivery roller Fuser delivery roller Duplex feed roller Main motor Fault detection Yes Engine control system 10 Figure 1 4 Fans Ss A Main fan Sub fan H Table 1 3 Fans Description Speed Intake Full Main fan FM1 Inside the product Sub fan FM2 Inside the product Intake Full Figure 1 5 Solenoids and clutches product aei M8002 l Table 1 4 Solenoids and clutches product Description Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 6 Solenoids and clutches Tray 3 and Tray 4 ce Table 1 5 Solenoids and clutches Tray 3 and Tray 4 Item Description SL3 Paper feeder pickup solenoid CLI Paper feeder pickup clutch E NOTE Tray 3 and Tray 4
3. First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Information Print Sec Report Yes Yes Prints a page that contains the No current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server No A security settings page is not printed TCP IP Enable On On Enable the TCP IP protocol Off Off Disable the TCP IP protocol Host Name Use the arrow An alphanumeric buttons to edit the string up to 32 host name characters used to identity the product NPIXXXXXX This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page The default host name is NPIxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware MAC address 166 Chapter 2 Solve problems Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp DHCP Auto IP Manual Specifies the method that TCP IPv4 parameters will be configured on the HP Jetdirect print server Booip Bootstrap Protocol Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4 server If selected and a DHCP lease exists the DHCP Release menu and the DHCP Renew menu are available to set DHCP lease options Auto IP Use for automatic link local IPv4 addressing An address in the form 169 254 x x is assigned automatically If you set this option
4. J1801 23 J1800 J1801 SDA WAKE ENG ai onm 20 z onto 19 loTTXD OTRXD 8 cures z ESRD FSRMSK 1 1 76 sou 1 g 1 73 serk 1 7 72 1 7 GND 1 70 s z e 5 3 2 a o 9 J2701 RLYD34 EJ RLYDI IRLOFF1 7 GND 2 0 om swhso J260 Interlock switch CST media out sensor PS3 Heg FDOOR SNS 3 3VB 2 T3 GND 3 3VC 31703 PS205 AUK MPT media out sensor 3200 anna TAGIN TAGOUT IMPPSNS GND 3 3VC ez 23 31701 GND 24VB GND GND 3 3VB 3 3VB GND GND 5VA 5VA E g xo 6 J4209 Formatter J1800 24VC 24vo m si z SQUARE ZEROX m IRLOFF2 ar 7 vum 16 GH VOLTOFE 14 3 2 a o 9 J2700 7 save 7 aave 7 z 3aVBOFF 2avcoFF 124VAOFF 1 GND 1 aE F a 1 GND z 124VBOFF I24VCOFF LE J2702 ez J2701 J2700 J2306 J2301 J2401 J2302 J2703 J2307 4 J2704 J2303 TRAYSNS GND 24VC 24VD J3 ww 220 Cassette detection switch FT41 FT2 sws0
5. 6 Registration shutter 98 Chapter 2 Solve problems Duplex feed roller duplex models ENWW ENWW Description Description Pressure roller Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup roller Tray 1 multipurpose tray separation pad Fuser output roller Feed roller Figure 2 22 Optional paper feeder Tray 3 and Tray 4 cross section Q ltem Description 1 Pickup roller 2 Feed roller 3 Separation pad Tools for troubleshooting 99 Location of connectors DC controller connections Figure 2 23 DC controller connections J2400 J2104 J2103 J2102 J2703 J2308 J2401 J2303 E Item Description Description J2100 Description J2102 J2103 J2104 J2105 J2200 J2201 J2301 100 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Formatter connections Figure 2 24 Formatter connections J18 64 pusak lss 31 Ja J24 J39 8 3 J10 Oxx J8 o 1J25 Co 3 14 Lo T Item Description Item Description J8 LVPS J31 Scanner J10 Stapler J38 Scanner J14 Fax card J39 Control panel J18 Scanner J64 Scanner J24 Scanner J81 No connection empty J25 LVPS J83 Scanner J29 Scanner JXX Control panel ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 101 Plug jack locations L
6. Courier Font Wide A4 Regular Dark Enabled Disabled Select which version of the Courier font you want to use The factory default setting is Regular which uses an average stroke width The Dark setting can be used if a heavier Courier font is needed Changes the printable area of A4 size paper If you enable this option eighty 10 pitch characters can be printed on a single line of A4 paper Print PS Errors Enabled Disabled Use this feature to select whether a PostScript PS error page is printed when the product encounters a PS error Print PDF Errors Enabled Disabled Selects whether a PDF error page is printed when the product encounters a PDF error Personality Auto PCL POSTSCRIPT PDF Configures the default print language or personality for the product Normally you should not change the product language If you change the setting to a specific product language the product does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to it Tools for troubleshooting 155 Table 2 20 General Print Settings menu continued First level Second level Values Description PCL Form Length Orientation Range 5 128 Default 60 Portrait Landscape Controls the PCL printcommand options PCL is a set of productcommands that Hewlett Packard developed to provide access to productfeatures
7. Touch the Cancel amp button e Wait 20 seconds and the control panel will return to the Home screen Scanning subsystem Calibrate the scanner Use this procedure to properly position the copied image on the page 24 TIP This adjustment might be required after the scanner or document feeder are replaced 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Touch the Calibration Cleaning button 3 Touch the Calibrate Scanner button and then follow the instructions provided on the screen ENWW Troubleshooting process 65 Tools for troubleshooting The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with your device Individual component diagnostics LED diagnostics LED engine and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems Understand lights on the formatter Two LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly Heartbeat LED 2 HP Jetdirect LEDs Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED provides information about product operation If a product error occurs the formatter displays a message on the control panel display However error situations can occur causing the formatter to control panel communication to be interrupted 2 NOTE HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and
8. Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics e g Cellular phone Bluetooth Yes X No If Yes please describe below Purpose Frequency Bandwidth Modulation Effective Radiate Power ERP Specifications Other Transmission Capabilities Does the device employ any other methods of non wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever e g anything other than standard hard wired TCP IP direct USB or parallel connections Yes X No If Yes please describe below Purpose Frequency Bandwidth Modulation Effective Radiate Power ERP Specifications Other Capabilities Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data whatsoever Yes XJ No If Yes please describe below Purpose Specifications Author Information Name Title Email Business Unit Security Technical IPG Marketing Engineer Date Prepared 04 24 12 Certificate of Volatility 357 Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The device is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Hu
9. Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Cleaning Page Touch the Print button to print the page The cleaning process can take several minutes When it is finished discard the printed page Set up an auto cleaning page Use the procedure in this section to set up an automatic cleaning page 1 ENWW From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Cleaning Settings Select the Auto Cleaning item and then select values for the Cleaning Interval option and the Cleaning Size option Touch the OK button Tools for troubleshooting 109 Print a configuration page Depending on the model up to three pages print when you print a configuration page In addition to the main configuration page the embedded Jetdirect configuration pages print Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current product settings to help troubleshoot product problems or to verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and product languages 1 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages 3 Touch Configuration Page to select it 4 print the pages Figure 2 33 Configuration page Configuration Page Page 1 hi i f f b From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to a
10. c0ceee 224 Card slot not initialized To clear touch Clear ccceeeeeees 224 Coniridge shipimoder n orien na a E E ene memes 224 ENWW ENWW Chosen personality not available To continue touch OK 224 Clean the rollers 2ac cs ne ie On ee te R 225 Cleaning disk lt X gt complete Do not power off ceeeeeeeeees 225 Close inner flap in duplexer ccceseccceeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeteeeeees 225 Close rear door riren E A E ea at aids 225 Close rear door Or touch OK to print to the rear bin 06 226 Close top Cover gape eter ere nnT ere cee rene teeter Meera tree seere trent ts 226 Data received cca oat bine bea eRe 226 Digital send communication error cceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 226 Disk full Delete stored jobs ccccccccsceceesseeeeeseneeeeeesteeeeeeaes 227 Disk low Delete stored jobs caniuanvannewnivneiandenns 227 Document feeder bin full cccccccccececceeenecececenteeeeceeeneneeeeeees 227 Document feeder is empty cccccesseeceeeeneeeeeteneeeeeeseeeeeeees 227 Document Feeder Kit low s cccsctcnnnes ono taeni teenies 228 Document Feeder Kit very low ccccceceeeeeeeeeeteetteeeeeeeeeseeeenaaees 228 Document Feeder Kit very low To continue touch OK 45 228 Document feeder top Cover Open ccccceesccceecesetteeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 228 EIO lt X gt disk not functional srs toistcnsveruiieccrsuouavorssvoruo
11. C Regulatory information ENWW FCC regulations Environmental product stewardship program Declaration of conformity Declaration of conformity fax models Certificate of Volatility Safety statements Additional statements for telecom fax products 345 FCC regulations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense fey NOTE Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules 346 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner This product has bee
12. H1 Fuser heater TP1 Thermoswitch TH1 Main thermistor TH2 Sub thermistor Pressure roller 20 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser protective function The protective function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser unit and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater e DC controller e The DC controller interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when it detects an abnormal temperature of the fuser heater e Fuser heater safety circuit o The fuser heater safety circuit interrupts power supply to the fuser heater when the detected temperature of the main and sub thermistors is abnormal e Thermoswitch The contact of the thermoswitch is broken to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater when the thermoswitch detects an abnormal temperature of the fuser heater ENWW Engine control system 21 Low voltage power supply 22 The low voltage power supply LVPS converts ac input voltage to dc voltage The LVPS has two fuses on the PCA The LVPS 24 V output is interrupted to the fuser and the high voltage power supply if the cartridge door interlock switch SW501 is in the off position cover open A WARNING The product power switch only interrupts de voltage from the LVPS The ac voltage is present in the product when the power cable is plugged into a power receptacle and the power switch is in the
13. ICT HP B00502010 Japan Telecom Mark 364 amp T A08 0138004 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Index A accessories installed information 112 acoustic specifications 344 ADF sensors 46 Administration menu control panel 114 anticounterfeit supplies 334 B Backup Restore menu control panel 182 batteries included 349 black page problem solving 295 blank page problem solving 290 blank pages troubleshooting 303 blurred print problem solving 297 buffer overflow errors 202 c cables USB troubleshooting 303 Calibrate Cleaning menu control panel 183 Canadian DOC regulations 358 cartridge memory tag 34 cartridges error messages 242 non HP 333 recycling 348 replace message 242 warranty 332 cautions iii characters misformed 294 ENWW checklist problems 50 circuit diagrams general 107 clean the paper path cleaning page printing 109 cleaning paper path 298 product 298 rollers 301 scanner glass 298 cleaning page 183 clear jams 261 clock error message 186 cold reset 308 color page count reset 306 components diagnostic tests 95 diagrams of 98 configuration page 66 configuration pages information 112 printing 110 control panel Administration menu 114 Backup Restore menu 182 Calibrate Cleaning menu 183 Copy Settings menu 122 Display Settings menu 158 Fax Settings menu 141 General Settings menu 115 Manage Supplies menu 161 Manage Trays men
14. No action is necessary Load Tray 1 Type Size Description Tray 1 is not loaded but there is not another tray available for the user to use instead Recommended action Load the tray with the requested paper Load Tray 1 Type Size To continue touch OK Description Tray 1 is empty 234 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action o o Load Tray 1 with the requested paper Or if paper is already in Tray 1 touch the OK button to print If paper is in another tray remove the paper and insert it in Tray 1 and then touch the OK button Load Tray lt X gt Size Description This message appears even though there is paper loaded in the tray Recommended action 1 2 Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides If the error persists use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning Use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely Reconnect the corresponding connector e MP tray Connector J85 J90 on the MP tray paper out sensor and the connector J107 on the DC controller PCA e Input tray Connectors J6 on the tray paper out sensor and the connector J131 on the DC controller PCA e 1X 500 sheet paper tray Conn
15. Use the Form Length feature to select the user soft default vertical form length Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan originals Select the Portrait option if the short edge is at the top or select the Landscape option if the long edge is at the top Font Source Internal Selects the font source for the user soft default font The list of available options varies depending on the installed product options Font Number Range 0 110 Default O Specifies the font number for the user soft default font using the source that is specified in the Font Source menu The product assigns a number to each font and lists it on the PCL font list The font number displays in the Font column of the printout Font Pitch Range 0 44 99 99 Default 10 If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font then use this feature to select a default pitch for a fixed spaced font Font Point Size Symbol Set Range 4 00 999 75 Default 12 00 Select from a list of symbol sets If the Font Source option and the Font Number setting indicate a contour font then use this feature to select a default point size for a proportional spaced font Select any one of several available symbol sets from the control panel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font The factory default value for this option is PC 8 Either P
16. 1 Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 2 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide 3 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 4 Try printing to a different output bin Wrinkles or creases 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself AakoCc AakoCc 2 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met AakoCc 3 Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 AaBbCc 4 Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and all adjustments have been AaBbCc made For more information see the product user guide 5 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications See the product user guide 6 If envelopes are creasing try storing envelopes so that they lie flat Vertical white lines 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself 2 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide 3 The photosensitive drum might be scratched or the developing roller might be damaged Replace the toner cartridge 4 The laser beam window might be dirty Clean the laser beam window on the laser scanner 5 The fuser inlet guide might be dirty Clean the guide 6 The fuser film mig
17. Ap LASERJET ENTERPRISE 500 MFP Troubleshooting Manual Ap HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525 Printers Troubleshooting Manual Copyright and License Trademark Credits 2012 Copyright Hewlett Packard Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are Development Company L P trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Reproduction adaptation or translation Microsoft Windows Windows XP without prior written permission is and Windows Vista are U S registered prohibited except as allowed under the trademarks of Microsoft Corporation copyright laws ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark The information contained herein is subject are registered U S marks to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Edition 1 5 2012 Part number CF116 90901 Conventions used in this guide A TIP Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts ATA ps p p E NOTE Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task A CAUTION Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product Z WARNING Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid pers
18. As 712l o WIE SPSAS CS UISS Ses SSSNIII J024 BOA SE ASAE OSS FAHI Uber JtS QS ASAA At amp Sue o0 on fir PE ulo Jo Pal 10 EMI statement Taiwan BEHNK EEPE Em gt TE EMSRS ETRE gt nie eak TE EAT gt EHE BERR GERR Laser statement for Finland ENWW Luokan 1 laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525dn M525f laserkirjoitin on k ytt j n kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty standardin EN 60825 1 2007 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstr lning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525dn M525f kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai Safety statements 359 muita k ytt j n kasikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yllapitotoimia
19. Item Description 1 High voltage power supply 2 Formatter Figure 2 29 PCA component locations 2 of 2 ltem Description DC controller PCA 2 Low voltage power supply ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 105 General timing charts t O E U o S E pos oO E oO O o ab N 9 5 Bt Ls Power ON 1 Print start command EEC12 2 Cassette pickup solenoid SL2 TOP sensor PS215 fs 4 Fuser output sensor PS2 5 BD signal VIDEO signal Scanner motor M3 Main motor M8003 Fuser motor M8002 Primary charging bias 4 o 12 Developing bias Fuser film bias 4 5 Main fan FM1 6 Sub fan FM2 o ENWW Chapter 2 Solve problems 106 Circuit diagrams Figure 2 31 8 7 General circuit diagram 1 of 2 Fuser unit Ulo H1 LT J15B BE J15A TP1 TB1 INL1001 ath Laser scanner unit Laser driver J100 13 3100 J1002 N J1011 J1001 Low voltage power supply 13 J187 J9999 ry RLTEST IOTTXD J1314 41312 JOTRXD 3 3VA J1313 1 31311 L J1304 J1303 L 1302 L 31301 J1404 L J1403 L J1402 J1401
20. Paper feeder Tray 3 PS461 CE530 69001 Tray 3 feeder unit PS461 Tray 3 Remove Tray 3 and cassette presence Cassette then reinstall it sensor Paper feeder Tray 4 PS451 CE530 69001 Tray 4 feeder unit PS451 Tray 4 Paper Remove Tray 4 and cassette media then push the sensor presence sensor lever Paper feeder media PS8008 Replace feeder unit Tray 4 feeder unit PS8008 Tray 4 Feed Remove the Tray 3 feed sensor Tray 4 cassette use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor through the small slot toward the front of the product Tools for troubleshooting 85 Table 2 11 Tray bin manual sensor test continued Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement Description Paper path Testing of sensor name number part number sensor test name Paper feeder Tray 4 PS461 CE530 69001 Tray 4 feeder unit PS461 Tray 4 Remove Tray 4 and cassette presence Cassette then reinstall it sensor Face down media PS4 Photo interruptor Photointerrupter PS4 Output Bin Full Open the rear door tray media full sensor WG8 85 19 000CN to about 15 Top cover assembly degrees Top cover assembly RM1 8516 000CN 1 Tray 3 and Tray 4 use PS451 and PS461 sensors 86 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS205 Tray 1 Paper sensor test Tray 1 paper sensor PS205 1 Push the sensor lever toward the right side of the product and hold it there for 3 seconds to activate the sensor Figure 2 13 Test the Tray 1 paper sensor T Je i 2 Check the contro
21. Paper sensor associated with this message PS8008 Check for a blockage in the Tray 3 or Tray 4 paper path 13 A3 FF or 13 A4 FF Description Residual media in paper path jam 1 Tray 3 or Tray 4 feed sensor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 187 Recommended action Recovery steps 1 2 3 4 Remove the tray 3 or 4 Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall the tray 3 or 4 Remove jammed paper if present Troubleshooting and parts 1 Paper Sensor associated with this message PS8008 2 Check for a blockage in the paper path 13 B2 D1 Description Tray 1 jam no pick Paper input delay jam 1 The paper did not reach the registration or Top sensor in time Recommended action Recovery steps 2 3 4 5 Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge Lift the green flaps for access Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Troubleshooting and parts 1 2 3 Make sure that the paper guides are snug against the paper stack Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type Paper sensor associated with this message TOP Sensor PS215 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the Top sensor PCA RM1 8617 000CN Inspect the separation pad and pick roller Clean or rep
22. Several bdl files might be listed Touch thedown arrow w button to scroll to the firmware upgrade file that you downloaded Touch the OK button to select it E NOTE If no bdl files are listed try saving the file to a different USB flash drive 14 15 ENWW Wait while the file transfers When the transfer is complete the message Complete displays on the screen Turn the product off remove the USB flash drive and then turn the product on Wait for several minutes while the product initializes e Ifthe upgrade is unsuccessful try sending the firmware upgrade file again e Ifthe upgrade fails again contact HP support at www hp com support j500MFPM525 Product upgrades 327 USB storage device control panel menu 1 Copy the xxxxxxx bd1 file to a portable USB flash drive 2 Turn the product on and then wait until it reaches the Ready state 3 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 4 Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button 5 Insert the portable USB storage device with the xxxxxxx bdl file on it into the USB port on the front of the product and then touch the OK button 6 Touch the xxxxxxx bdl file and then touch the Upgrade button 2 TIP If there is more than one xxxxxxx bd1 file on the storage device make sure that you 7 select the correct file for this product 7 When the product prompts you to confirm the upgrade touch the Upgrad
23. CPU The formatter incorporates a 800 MHz processor Memory The random access memory RAM on the formatter PCA contains the page I O buffers and the font storage area It stores printing and font information received from the host system and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print image data before the data is sent to the print engine NOTE If the product encounters a problem when managing available memory a clearable warning message displays on the control panel display Firmware The firmware is contained on the hard disk drive HDD M525f model only or solid state module SSM M525dn model only A remote firmware upgrade process is available which overwrites the firmware Nonvolatile memory The product uses nonvolatile memory NVRAM to store device and user configuration settings The contents of NVRAM are retained when the product is turned off or disconnected PJL overview The printer job language PJL is an integral part of configuration in addition to the standard printer command language PCL With standard cabling the product can use PJL to perform a variety of functions such as these e Two way communication The product communicates with the host computer through a network connection or a USB connection The product can inform the host about such things as the control panel settings and the control panel settings can be changed from the host e Dynamic I O switching The produ
24. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 185 Interpret control panel messages Control panel message types The control panel messages and event code errors indicate the current product status or situations that might require action E NOTE Event log errors do not appear on the control panel display Access the event log to view or print the event log errors Control panel messages appear temporarily and might require that you acknowledge the message by touching the OK button to resume printing or by touching the Stop button to cancel the job With certain messages the job might not finish printing or the print quality might be affected If the message is related to printing and the auto continue feature is on the product will attempt to resume printing after the message has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement For some messages restarting the product might fix the problem If a critical error persists the product might require service Control panel messages 11 00 YY Internal clock error To continue touch OK Description The product real time clock has experienced an error gt XX 01 Clock battery failed o XX 02 Realtime clock failed Recommended action Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again set the time and date at the control panel If the error persists replace the formatter 13 A3 D3 or 13 A4 D4 Description 13 A3 D3 paper input delay jam 2 paper did not reach the tray 3 feed se
25. ITB top detection error 07 Paper transportation error 08 Optional input source delay 09 Sub thermistor abnormally high temperature 18 Scan line inclination adjustment request 19 T2 roller HV 20 Image drum HV 206 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Y fuser mode o Q Photo paper 1 Photo paper 2 Photo paper 3 Designated paper 2 Designated paper 3 or NA typed or Autosense o 1 Autosense normal special case distinguished from typed Normal Normal typed not Autosense Light paper 1 2 or 3 typed or Autosense Heavy paper 1 typed or Autosense Heavy paper 2 typed or Autosense Heavy paper 3 typed or Autosense Glossy paper 1 typed or Autosense Glossy paper 2 typed or Autosense o 0 ON OD HO KR WN Glossy paper 3 typed or Autosense A Glossy film typed or Autosense gt B Transparency typed or Autosense C Label o D Envelope 1 Envelope 2 Envelope 3 gt E Rough designated paper 1 typed or Autosense o F reserved for future fuser mode Z source tray 1 Tray 1 gt 2 Tray 2 o 3 Tray 3 o D Duplexer Recommended action 1 To clear message touch the OK button 2 Ifthe message reappears turn the product off and then on 3 Ifthe error persists replace the DC controller PCA 47 FC YZ Printer calibration failed To continue touch OK Description The product is unable to access or implement one of the image pattern files ENWW Tools for troubl
26. If a fax job is in memory for either of these reasons an entry for the job displays in the fax log Print the fax activity log and check the Result column for jobs with a Pending designation Solve fax problems 321 Fax error codes If a fax problem occurs which prevents or interrupts fax transmission an error code is generated that can help in determining the cause of the problem Error codes show up in the fax activity log the fax call report and the T 30 Protocol Trace Print one of these reports to obtain the error code A detailed description of the error codes and the appropriate action is available at www hp com Search for HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 Fax error messages on the product control panel If the fax process is interrupted or an error occurs during a fax transmission or reception a two part status error description is generated by the fax subsystem on the product Normal or successful faxes also generate messages indicating success The message information consists of a text description and a numeric code a few messages do not include numeric codes Only the text part of the message is displayed on the product control panel however both the text message and numeric code are listed in the Fax Activity Report Fax Call Report and the Fax T 30 Trace The numeric code is shown in parentheses after the text part of the message in the reports The fax modem generates the numeric code Usually a numeri
27. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 7 The toner cartridge might need to be replaced 8 The printcartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty Clean the contacts 9 Stop a print job before it is complete and then remove the toner cartridge Open the photosensitive drum shield and look at the toner image on the drum gt If the image is not fully transferring to the page replace the transfer roller If the toner on the drum is faint replace the laser scanner 10 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBkhCc AaBkCc AaBbCc 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself 2 Try using a different type of paper 3 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 4 Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser 5 The toner cartridge might need to be replaced Loose toner AaBboCc Kimo A AaBbCc AaBboCc Loose toner in this context is defined as toner that can be rubbed off the page 1 If you have observed a rougher texture on one side of your paper try printing on the smoother side 2 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 3 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the p
28. Photo paper 1 2 3 Designated paper 2 3 or NA typed or AutoSense AutoSense Normal special case distinguished from typed Normal Normal typed not AutoSense Light paper 1 2 or 3 typed or AutoSense Heavy paper 1 typed or AutoSense Heavy paper 2 typed or AutoSense Heavy paper 3 typed or AutoSense Glossy paper 1 typed or AutoSense Glossy paper 2 typed or AutoSense Glossy paper 3 typed or AutoSense A Glossy film typed or AutoSense B Transparency typed or AutoSense C Label Tools for troubleshooting 209 D Envelopel Envelope2 or Envelope3 e E Rough designated paper 1 typed or AutoSense e F Reserved for future fuser mode Y previous product sleep state Z next product sleep state e Q Printing e 1 Standby level 1 no temperature control Standby level 2 high temperature control Standby level 3 middle temperature control 2 3 e 4 Standby level 4 low temperature control 5 Middle sleep 6 Deep sleep e F Off Recommended action W A High fuser temperature 2 1 Y 4 5 Remove and then reseat the fuser Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up Check the product power source Make sure the power source meets product requirements Make sure this is the only device using the circuit Check t
29. Time Event Days If you have concerns about the security of private faxes use this feature to store faxes rather than having them automatically print Select Incoming Fax Options and then you can choose fo always store faxes always print them or you can set up a schedule for each day of the week If you are using a fax printing schedule use this menu to configure when to print faxes Tools for troubleshooting 151 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Blocked Fax Fax Number to Block The blocked fax list Numbers can contain up to 30 numbers When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers it deletes the incoming fax It also logs the blocked fax in the activity log along with job accounting information Add blocked numbers Enter a fax number into the Fax Number to Block field and then touch the arrow button to add a new number to the blocked fax list Remove blocked numbers Select a number and touch the Delete button to delete it from the blocked fax list Clear all blocked numbers Touch the Delete All button to clear all of the numbers from the blocked fax list You can also use the Blocked Fax List report in the Information menu to view the list of the fax numbers that have been blocked on this product 152 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu con
30. Tray 3 paper sensor 91 Tray 4 cassette sensor 94 Tray 4 feed sensor 84 Tray 4 paper sensor 93 sensors ADF 46 diagnostic tests 71 tests manual 73 tests manual tray bin 85 separation stage 32 serial number 307 Service ID convert to date 307 restore 307 Service menu options 306 Service menu control panel 185 service settings 325 settings restore factory 309 size specifications product 344 skewed pages 294 slow fax reception 318 slow fax transmission 320 smeared toner problem solving 293 software software license agreement 336 solve problems 49 solving direct connect problems 304 network problems 304 specifications electrical and acoustic 344 physical 344 specks problem solving 291 296 spots problem solving 291 296 status messages types of 186 status page 66 status fax accessory page 315 stop printing for test 94 supplies counterfeit 334 error messages 242 non HP 333 recycling 348 replace message 242 support online 341 T T 30 Trace report 325 Taiwan EMI statement 359 TCP IP information 111 technical support online 341 tests engine 69 manual sensor 73 networks 173 paper path 71 paper path sensors 71 print stop 94 tray bin manual sensor 85 text problem solving blurred 297 misformed characters 294 tips iii tire tracks problem solving 296 toner output quality problem solving 293 toner cartridge jams 271 memory tag 34 toner cartridges error messages 242 memory chips 335 non
31. appear on the control panel display Firmware boot Green solid Yellow fast flash NOTE If applicable error messages appear e Control panel not connected on the control panel display Product operational 49 xx yy Control panel connection interrupted after the product is operational Green heartbeat blink NOTE If applicable error messages appear on the control panel display Not applicable Not applicable Yellow fast flash e Control panel not connected LED off NOTE An error message for example 49 xx yy might appear on the control panel display Eventually a formatter connection missing message will appear Turn the power off and then on again to restart the initialization process If the error persists perform a firmware upgrade Yellow fast flash e Control panel not connected Sleep Mode Approaching Sleep Mode Wake up from Sleep Mode Approaching wake up from Sleep Mode Green slow blink Green slow blink Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression Not applicable Not applicable Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression 68 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs The yellow LED indicates network activity and the green LED indicates the link status A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic If the green LED is off a link ha
32. more pages per sheet and you want fo print a border around each page select the Add Page Borders option Original Size Select from a list of sizes that the product supports Describes the page size of the original document 128 Chapter 2 Solve problems Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Booklet Format Booklet Values Booklet off Booklet on Description Use to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet The product arranges the pages in the correct order For example if the original document has eight pages the product prints pages 1 and 8 on the same sheet Original Sides sided 2 sided Select the sided option if the original document is printed on only one side Select the 2 sided option if the original document is printed on two sides Borders on Each Page To print a border around each page select the Borders on Each Page option Edge to Edge Normal recommended Edge to Edge output Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is printed close to the edges Combine with the Reduce Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies When the Edge to Edge feature is turned on the product minimizes margins and prints as close to the edge of the paper as possible Job Build Job
33. notice or proprietary restriction from the Software LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the HP Software except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law CONSENT TO USE OF DATA HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to i your Use of the Software or the HP Product or ii the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product All such information will be subject to HP s privacy policy HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U S 5 00 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTION PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF PRIVACY RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE Some sta
34. product error conditions or out of staples indications are not displayed on the control panel 48 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW 2 Solve problems NOTE To perform diagnostic and configuration procedures for example resetting page counts for the product you must install the CP1210 Service Config Tool available at your HP authorized repair center e Solve problems checklist e Menu map e Preboot menu options e Current settings pages e Troubleshooting process e Tools for troubleshooting e Clear jams e Solve paper handling problems e Use manual print modes e Solve image quality problems e Clean the product e Solve performance problems e Solve connectivity problems e Service mode functions e Solve fax problems e Product upgrades ENWW Solve problems checklist Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product 1 If the control panel is blank or black complete these steps a Check the power cable Check that the power is turned on c Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration See the label that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications connect the product directly into the electrical outlet If it is already connected into the outlet try a different outlet 2 The control panel should indicate a Re
35. remove the document from the output bin Do not discard blank pages 2 Flip the document over so the printed side is up 3 Load document in Tray 1 4 Touch the OK button to print the second side of the job Manually feed Size Description This message appears when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is not loaded Recommended action Load tray with requested paper Manually feed Size To continue touch OK Description This message appears when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is not loaded and other trays are available Recommended action o Load tray with requested paper o If paper is already in tray touch the Help button to exit the message and then touch the OK button to print gt To use another tray clear paper from Tray 1 touch the Help button to exit the message and then touch the OK button Manually feed Size To use another tray touch Options Description This message appears when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is not loaded and other trays are available ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 237 Recommended action o Load tray with requested paper o To use another tray clear paper from Tray 1 touch Options to select a different tray Manually feed Type Size To continue touch OK Description This message appears when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is not loaded and other trays are available Recommended action o Load tray with requested paper o If paper is already in t
36. such as magazine clippings or pages from books Photograph Best suited for making copies of printed pictures Output Quality High large file Use to select the quality for the output Medium Higher quality images require a larger file size than lower quality images Larger files take more time to send and some recipients might have trouble receiving larger files Low small file 134 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides l sided Use to describe the layout for each side 2 sided of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides also select the 2 sided format that matches the original document Orientation Automatically detect For some features to work correctly you Portrait must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top In the Orientation area select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation Landscape ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 135 Table
37. the selected tests Yes Initiate the selected tests Ping Results Packets Sent Default 00000 Shows the number of packets 0 65535 sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed Packets Received Default 00000 Shows the number of packets 0 65535 received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed The default is O Percent Lost Default 000 Shows the percent O to 100 of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed 176 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description RTT Min Default 0000 Shows the minimum detected roundtrip time RTT from O to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response RTT Max Default 0000 Shows the maximum detected roundtrip time RTT from O to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response RTT Average Default 0000 Shows the average round trip time RTT from 0 to 4096 milliseconds for packet transmission and response Ping In Progress Yes No Shows whether a ping test is in progress Yes Indicates a test in progress No Indicates that a test completed or was not run Refresh Yes No When viewing the ping test results t
38. 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description X1 Shift 5 00 mm to 5 00 mm Y1 Shift X2 Shift Y2 Shift The direction that is perpendicular to the way the paper passes through the product is referred to as X This is also known as the scan direction X1 is the scan direction for a single sided page or for the second side of a two sided page X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two sided page The direction that the paper feeds through the product is referred to as Y Y1 is the feed direction for a single sided page or for the second side of a two sided page Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a two sided page Adjust Paper Types Select from a list of Print Mode Select from a list of paper types that the print modes product supports The available options are the same for each paper type Changing the Print Mode setting is usually the first thing to try to resolve print quality problems Problems can include toner not sticking well to the page a faint image of the page repeated on the same or following page incorrect gloss level etc 118 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Resistance Mode Normal Use this setting to correct print quality Up problems in l
39. 2 Solve problems ENWW Tray bin manual sensor test Use this test to test paper path sensors and the paper size switches manually The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test Table 2 11 Tray bin manual sensor test Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement Description Paper path Testing of sensor name number part number sensor test name MP tray media PS205 RM1 8621 O00CN MP sensor PCA PS205 Tray 1 Paper Push the sensor lever presence sensor to the right of the center of the tray and hold it there for 3 seconds Cassette media PS3 RM1 8508 000CN Tray 2 paper pickup PS3 Tray 2 Paper Remove the Tray 2 presence sensor assembly and then push the sensor lever Tray 2 cassette SW235 RM1 8620 000CN Tray sensor PCA SW235 Tray 2 Remove the Tray 2 presence switch Cassette and then reinstall it Paper feeder media PS8008 CE530 69001 Tray 3 feeder unit PS8008 Tray 3 Feed Remove the Tray 2 feed sensor Tray 3 cassette use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor through the small slot toward the front of the product Paper feeder Tray 3 PS451 CE530 69001 Tray 3 feeder unit PS451 Tray 3 Paper Remove Tray 3 and cassette media then push the sensor presence sensor lever
40. 268 Japanese VCCI statement 358 Jetdirect print server lights 66 K Korean EMC statement 359 L laser beam exposure stage 30 laser safety statements 358 359 laser scanner operations 26 LEDs See lights license software 336 light print problem solving 290 lights formatter 66 troubleshooting with 66 lines horizontal problem solving 292 295 lines vertical problem solving 295 ENWW lines problem solving 292 296 link speed settings 178 log of events messages listed numerically 255 loose toner problem solving 293 M Manage Supplies menu control panel 161 Manage Trays menu control panel 163 manual print modes 288 material restrictions 349 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 350 memory information 110 insufficient 198 toner cartridge 34 memory chip toner cartridge description 335 menus control panel Administration 114 Backup Restore 182 Calibrate Cleaning 183 Copy Settings 122 Display Settings 158 Fax Settings 141 General Settings 115 Manage Supplies 161 Manage Trays 163 Network Settings 165 Print Options 157 Print Settings 155 Reports 114 Scan Digital Send Settings 130 Service 185 Troubleshooting 179 USB Firmware Upgrade 185 mercury free product 349 messages event log listed numerically 255 numerical list 186 types of 186 misformed characters problem solving 294 model number 111 ENWW modem speed 318 N Network Settings menu control panel 165 networks diagnostics 173 HP embedd
41. 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in Tray lt X gt To use another tray TOUCH OBHOMS deito A AEE ean ea a e wees 205 41 WX YZ Error To use another tray touch Options 006 206 A7 FC YZ Printer calibration failed To continue touch OK 207 47 WX YZ Printer calibration failed cccccccceesssseceeeesesseeeeees 208 49 XX YY Error To continue turn off then on o ae 209 50 WX YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on 00s0e0es 209 51 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on ossee 212 52 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 52 00 20 Error To continue turn off then on o s 213 52 lt XX gt 00 Error To continue turn off then On o n 214 DA XK NY ETOT aranna ti A E N E 214 55 XX YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on 215 56 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on ossee 215 SZ OOOX Eronen teat onsenidetaasrne deeds R wads saetenctatte 215 58 00 04 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 217 59 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 217 59 00 20 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 217 59 00 30 Error To continue turn off then on ccccceeeeseeeeeeees 217 59 00 40 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeees 217 59 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on o s 218 59 05 50 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeee
42. 6 Fusing e Drum cleaning block Step 7 Drum cleaning Figure 1 17 Image formation process Media path lt Direction of drum rotation Fusing Fixing ENWW Latent image formation Developing Image formation system 29 Latent image formation stage During the latent image formation stage the laser scanner forms an invisible image on the photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge Primary charging Step 1 DC and AC biases are applied to the primary charging roller which transfers a uniform negative potential to the photosensitive drum Figure 1 18 Primary charging Primary charging roller Primary charging bias Photosensitive drum Laser beam exposure Step 2 The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize negative charges on parts of the drum surface An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum where negative charges were neutralized Figure 1 19 Laser beam exposure Laser beam Unexposed area Exposed area 30 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Developing stage Toner cartridge Step 3 In the toner cartridge the developing cylinder comes in contact with the photosensitive drum to deposit toner onto the electrostatic latent image Figure 1 20 Toner cartridge Blade Developing roller Exposed area Unexposed area Unexposed area _ l Exposed area Developing bias Photosensitive dr
43. Additional 500 sheet feeders Look on the main configuration page under Paper Trays and Options Engine cycles and event logs Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors To see a list of the 50 most recent errors print an event log from the Diagnostics menu Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page under Device Information Event log information Event log information Look on the main configuration page under Event log Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive defects ruler 112 Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image quality problems Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page Find the distance between identical defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect Chapter 2 Solve problems 6 NOTE When printing this defect ruler verify that any scaling options in the print driver are disabled ENWW 0mm ______ gt 38 mm _ gt 43 6 mm _______ gt 50 mm _______ gt 76 mm 79 mm gt 95 mm Distance between defects Product components that cause the defect 38 mm Toner cartridge primary charging roller 43 6 mm Print engine transf
44. C2 13 B9 C3 13 B9 C4 13 B9 C5 or 13 B9 CB Wrap jam 1 paper first detected at fuser output sensor and then disappears from sensor before it should fuser output paper is wrapped around the fuser Fuser mode o o C2 Normal fuser mode C3 Light 1 2 fuser mode C4 Heavy 1 fuser mode C5 Heavy 2 fuser mode CB Overhead transparency fuser mode Recommended action Ey NOTE Pre printed paper overhead transparency and labels must meet product specifications Make sure that labels were not previously put through a printer and that there are no adhesive areas exposed Recovery steps _ o VS SS N Open the rear door to second position Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Close the rear door 194 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 2 Make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type Use the product control panel to check the product configuration and check the Print Driver from the application that causes the error 3 Replace the fuser 13 BA EE or 13 DA EE Description Door open jam 1 Door opens during print job When the product power is turned on paper remains in the paper path triggering the duplex sensor o gt 13 BA EE Toner door o gt 13 DA EE Rear door Recommended action Close all doors Trouble
45. Clear Description A PIL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Card slot is write protected To clear touch Clear Description The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Card slot not initialized To clear touch Clear Description This file storage component must be initialized before use Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component Cartridge ship mode Description Manufacturing use only should not be seen in field Recommended action Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition Chosen personality not available To continue touch OK Description A print job requested a product language personality that is not available for this product The job will not print and will be cleared from memory 224 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Print the job by using a product driver for a different print language or add the requested language to the product if possible To see a list of available personalities print a configuration page Clean the rollers Description The product has reached the roller cleaning very low count Clean the ADF rollers to maintain image quality Recommended action 1 Open document feeder t
46. Download the firmware from the Preboot menu 4 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 99 00 09 The firmware upgrade was canceled by the Resend the firmware upgrade to the product user 99 00 10 99 00 11 The preboot partition is full 1 Download the firmware again 2 If the error persists perform the clean disk format disk process 3 Download the firmware from the Preboot menu 99 00 12 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not The firmware file sent was not the correct file performed An invalid file was sent Download the firmware file again making sure to download the file for the correct product model Attempt the upgrade again 99 00 13 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not The firmware file sent was not the correct file performed An invalid file was sent Download the firmware file again making 99 00 14 sure to download the file for the correct product model Attempt the upgrade again 99 00 20 The bundle is not for this product Download the firmware file again and attempt the upgrade again 99 00 21 The bundle is not signed with the correct signature or the signature is invalid 99 00 22 The bundle header version is not supported by this firmware 99 00 23 The package header version is not supported by this firmware 99 00 24 The format of the firmware bundle not correct 99 00 25 99 00 26 260 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams Auto navigation for clearing jams The auto navigation feature assists y
47. HP 333 recycling 348 replace message 242 warranty 332 transfer stage 32 ENWW Tray 1 jams 265 Tray 2 jams 268 tray selection use requested tray 163 troubleshooting 49 blank pages 303 checklist 50 clean the paper path 109 configuration page 66 configuration pages for 110 control panel 95 control panel messages numerical 186 control panel checks 63 demo page 66 direct connect problems 304 engine test 69 eventlog 66 event log messages numerical list 255 flowchart 61 lights using 66 network problems 304 pages not printing 303 pages printing slowly 303 paper feed problems 286 PBX systems 320 power 62 process 6 reports and tools 66 scanner calibration 65 scanning subsystem 65 slow fax reception 318 slow fax transmission 320 status page 66 USB cables 303 Troubleshooting menu control panel 179 U upgrades downloading product 326 USB Firmware Upgrade menu control panel 185 USB port troubleshooting 303 Use Requested Tray 163 ENWW v version hardware firmware 111 VolP 317 W warnings iii warranty customer self repair 340 license 336 product 330 toner cartridges 332 warranty date information 307 waste disposal 350 wavy paper problem solving 295 Web sites customer support 341 fraud reports 334 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS 350 white horizontal lines or spots problem solving 295 white vertical lines or spots problem solving 295 wrinkled paper problem solving 295 Index 36
48. Heavy 2 fuser mode gt AB Overhead transparency fuser mode Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Open the rear door to second position 2 Remove jammed paper if present 3 Close the rear door Troubleshooting and parts 1 Clear the paper path of any jammed paper 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Paper Sensor associated with this message PS2 13 B9 XX ENWW Description 13 B9 D1 13 B9 D2 13 B9 D3 13 B9 D4 or 13 B9 DD Fuser delivery delay jam 1 paper did not reach the fuser output sensor in time fuser output o _D1 Tray 1 o D2 Tray 2 o gt D3 Tray 3 o D4 Tray 4 o DD Duplexer Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Open the rear door to second position Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge gt amp Remove jammed paper if present Tools for troubleshooting 193 5 6 Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Close the rear door Troubleshooting and parts 1 Remove all paper and check for residual pieces that could cause the jams 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Paper sensor associated with this message PS2 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the fuser 4 Ifthe sensor is working correctly the error only occurs on a duplex job and the media is jammed before the fuser with only one side fused replace the pendulum assembly RM1 6598 000CN 13 B9 XX Description 13 B9
49. How to How to Relative time Control consumption power enable disable mode to Ready panel term button light mode put in Ready state state Off Less than 0 5W Off Manually Press the power Longest press the button power button Automatically sleep timer expires Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Power Status of How to How to Relative time Control consumption power enable disable mode to Ready panel term button light mode put in Ready state state Auto off Less than 1W Blinks at 3 Sleep timer Printing or Longer than Network port second intervals expires network Sleep mode maintenance tasks Insert or remove paper from the ADF Open or close the scanner Open the cartridge door Touch the control panel touchscreen Press the power button Sleep A1W Approximately Blinks at 3 Sleep timer Printing or Shortest All events 6W second intervals expires network maintenance tasks Insert or remove paper from the ADF Open or close the scanner Open the cartridge door Touch the control panel touchscreen Press the power button NOTE Product error messages override the Sleep message The product enters sleep mode at the appropriate time but the error message continues to appear Input output The product receives print data primarily from the embedded HP Jetdirect print server The product also has a USB 2 0 port for connecting directly to a computer ENWW Formatter control system 5
50. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock the product does not sense that the paper is loaded Remove the shipping lock and then load the tray Tray lt X gt empty Type Size Description The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded but the current job does not need this tray to print Recommended action Refill the tray at a convenient time Ey NOTE This could be a false message If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock the product does not sense that the paper is loaded Remove the shipping lock and then load the tray Tray lt X gt open Description The specified tray is open or not closed completely Recommended action 1 Close the tray 2 If this message appears and the lifter base assembly was removed or replaced make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated 3 If the error persists use the paper size switches SW2 3 SW82 83 SW92 93 test in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to test the switches If they do not respond replace associated the lifter drive assembly Tray lt X gt overfilled Remove excess paper Description A tray in the product is overfilled with paper Printing can continue from a different tray Recommended action Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray NOTE If this message appears and the paper pickup assembly was removed or replaced make sure that the connector a
51. Include Margins The product reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page Paper Selection Manually feed For the best color and image quality select the Automatic appropriate paper type from the control panel menu or from the print driver Tray 1 Type Size Tray lt X gt Type Size ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 125 Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the Use to improve the overall slide bar or touch quality of the copy Automatic Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors Contrast Select a value using the Adjust the Contrast setting slide bar or touch Automatic to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Background Cleanup Sharpness Default Select a value using the slide bar or touch Automatic Select a value using the slide bar or touch Automatic Adjust the Background Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother Select this to make the selected Image Adjustment setting the default value Content
52. Open top cover 2 Remove the toner cartridge 3 Lift the green flaps for access 4 Remove jammed paper if present 5 Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that the paper guides are snug against the paper stack 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type 4 Paper sensor associated with this message TOP Sensor PS215 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the Top sensor PCA RM1 8617 OOOCN 5 Inspect the separation pad and pick roller Clean or replace if required 13 B2 XX Description Media late to registration sensor o 13 B2 D3 Paper input delay jam 1 paper remained at the registration sensor longer than legal sized media would Tray 3 registration or Top sensor o 13 B2 D4 Paper input stay jam 1 paper remained at the registration sensor longer than legal sized media would Tray 4 registration or Top sensor Recommended action Recovery steps Remove Tray 2 Remove jammed paper if present 2 3 Open top cover 4 Remove the toner cartridge 5 Lift the green flaps for access ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 191 6 7 Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Troubleshooting and parts 1 Check the
53. Shes dnueubrrredunmobnveeien ted 0 Solve USB connection prablems tieecessesssvendetvadewns cause in tus ioaerune ver vadalanseauovinasctetets 0 Solve wired network problems sx2ucieyiret teint Wale Re outset aee 0 The product has a poor physical connection cccseeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeneeetneeeees 0 The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product 0 eee 0 The computer is unable to communicate with the product s cssereeeeeees 0 The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network 0 New software programs might be causing compatibility problems 0 The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly cccecceeeeesteeeees 0 The product is disabled or other network settings are incorrect ceeeee 0 Service mode functions vrsaretuetetuasletatiouesunsmtetads nae tdotiaden aunannntenon een otontrntaunremernarten 0 Seryice MENU i e op tariae ena manent eaa wr eg A ana aa oi nanan 0 ENWW Prod ct resets ounneri mnene aen puis aneen anena EE a nE 309 Restore factory set defaults 1 cctusthacwncieiesseuurestrieieesieinenunen 309 Restore the service ID 255 sats vaxnitschsietanuvcapiaaissdasnchanmtniinanienctsdauncheuranunsiyieneds 309 Product cold reset secuencia ae E E A E ER E 310 Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ci scssviaacvarsvuenteduernventervesnnieventendounsaoeonartecgvues 310 Active and repository firmware locations ccccseeeeee
54. Solve wired network problems Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network Before beginning print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on this page e The product has a poor physical connection e The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product e The computer is unable to communicate with the product e The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network e New software programs might be causing compatibility problems e The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly e The product is disabled or other network settings are incorrect The product has a poor physical connection 1 Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length 2 Verity that cable connections are secure 3 Look at the network port connection on the back of the product and verify that the amber activity light and the green link status light are lit 4 Ifthe problem continues try a different cable or port on the hub The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product 304 1 Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page 2 If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP IP port select the
55. Theory of operation ENWW Additional tray fe NOTE This product supports identical 500 sheet input trays Tray 3 and Tray 4 Tray driver PCA The following figure shows the signals between the DC controller and the tray driver PCA Figure 1 31 Tray 3 and Tray 4 driver PCA block diagram oo i Optional paper feeder Clutch Solenoid Paper feeder DC controller connector PCB Photointerrupter Switch ENWW Additional tray 43 Paper pickup and feed Ey NOTE Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500 sheet input trays The following figure shows the pickup and feed paper path Tray 3 shown Figure 1 32 Tray 3 and Tray 4 pickup feed and delivery block diagram 5 oe an Ao eax a Q A Optional paper feeder separation pad Optional paper feeder Optional paper feeder pickup roller feed roller 44 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Paper level and size detection e PS451 paper feeder media presence sensor detects if media is present in the tray NOTE PS451 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4 e Media size is detected after the page enters the product See Cassette paper size detection cassette paper detection on page 40 Jam detection e PS8008 paper feeder media feed sensor detects jams in the paper feeder ENWW Additional tray 45 Scanning image capture system Control panel The control panel is an 8 in full color SVGA 800 x 6
56. Very Low Settings Stop Configure how the product responds Prompt to continue when the document feeder kit is reaching the end of its estimated life Continue Stop The product stops until you replace the document feeder kit Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the document feeder kit You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product alerts you that the document feeder kit is very low but it continues printing Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage Data menu provides Not on supplies a way to suppress the toner cartridges from storing most of the information gathered exclusively for the purpose of understanding the usage of the product Select the On supplies setting to store the data on the toner cartridge memory chip Select the Not on supplies setting to suppress the information from being stored on the memory chip 162 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 23 Manage Supplies menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Supply Messages Low Message On Use to configure whether a message Off displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low but have not yet reached the low threshold Reset Supplies New Document Reset Select this option if Feeder Kit you have installed a Cancel new document feeder kit Manage Trays menu To display At the product control panel select
57. aAA Ea R E E Eana E a 8 Motors fans clutches solenoids switches and sensors cccsseecceccecuesescceeusaeeseceenees 9 DC controller operations 20s vevacecscawasdscansaesnenh savasoretsavaeeiveadvedeavncaci nem benencgiedmaionse 16 Fuserconfrol EIEN espiren nnee a E EE a aa Ea anie 18 Fuser failure detection cavieienenrr anemia erie 19 Fuser temperature control nscsdveenutessaiuinedeisimiaviesenaniarventedermealtanalis 20 Fuser protective function nnasknioasanrsvondundadwashtuespoionsaetinurtvmcanaiiobigomnineanwanen 21 Low voltage power supply scicenciawienteeiden derek ren merece einenes wearer 22 Overcurrent overvoltage protection cc cccecsssceeeesseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeensaes 23 High voltage power supply a veliecsencwardcnssieiaseo nan dstenanddinasaibssteltetieaintayeeeaieoiaeertenakivontaed 24 Formater sorses einen a hte noted enliotadan snes oats opbendetennaant ica npuanobesvel E 25 Formatter heartbeat ED ccssscsedeeseawnscdnecaannndonnnaeevnivaveteceraacedenantanensnebuansads 25 Laser scanner system pine niwirusudptenswaaheunaseaipeaabisan bv sieindavsnteqasdlmnnebitanleatneuentendbdnosbate 26 laser failure detection 2 aneaahionenmenracaanivarieryned soeinen saeperaewirrmianeanienniers 27 Image formation system ssiri riirii ninni arinn a NEENA EEEa atoni ieni in i ne aineina eia 28 Electrophotographic process oni vnaacvnarhccayiniasciomanantehanddparanisonesiemaesieateeabembsaueebcnantiiansans 28 ENWW Image
58. and the job is being printed on both sides some pages can be lost On The product always reprints jammed pages Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed This might cause overall performance to suffer Auto Recovery Enabled The product attempts to reprint jammed Disabled pages when sufficient memory is available This is the default setting 120 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Manage Stored Jobs Second level Sort Stored Jobs By Values Job Name Date Description This option allows you list the jobs either Alphabetically or Chronologically Quick Copy Job Held Timeout Off 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Sets a maximum storage time limit for stored Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs If a stored job is not printed during this period it is deleted Quick Copy Job Storage Limit Default Folder Name 1 100 Default 32 Configure global settings for jobs that are stored in the product memory The Quick Copy Job Storage Limit feature specifies the number of Quick Copy and Proof and Hold jobs that can be stored on the product The maximum allowed value is 100 Type the name for the stored jobs folder that is accessible to all users Enable Retrieve from USB Enabled Disabled Enables the product to open a file from a USB device Tools for troub
59. and then on 2 If the environment sensor has been removed or replaced check the connector J2 on the environment sensor and the connector J108 on the DC controller PCA 3 If the error persists replace the environment sensor assembly 54 00 04 Engine temperature sensor 1 abnormality warning 1 Turn the product off and then on 214 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 55 XX YY DC controller error To continue turn off then on Description The communication link between the formatter and DC controller was lost gt 55 00 00 event code Internal communication error e 55 00 01 event code DC controller memory error 55 00 03 event code DC controller no engine response gt 55 00 04 event code DC controller communications timeout Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Perform an engine test 3 Verify the connectors on the DC controller 4 If the error persists replace the DC controller 56 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a communication error with the optional paper tray e 56 00 01 event code Illegal input selected paper input tray is unavailable gt 56 00 02 event code Illegal output selected paper output bin is unavailable Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Reseat the optional paper tray 3 Check the input connectors for damage If a connector is damaged replace the connector 57 00 0X Error Description A fan error
60. are identical 500 sheet input trays ENWW Engine control system 11 Figure 1 7 Switches product Table 1 6 Switches product Description Cassette presence switch SWw501 Cartridge door switch 12 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 8 Switches Tray 3 and Tray 4 ce Table 1 7 Switches Tray 3 and Tray 4 Description Paper feeder cassette presence switch fy NOTE Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500 sheet input trays Engine control system 13 ENWW Figure 1 9 Sensors PS205 y e PS502 O TE E ga o Bia Ea tann J PS8008 PS451 y PS8008 PS451 y l Table 1 8 Sensors Face up sensor Item Description PS1 PS225 Media width sensor PS502 Duplex media feed sensor PS2 Fuser delivery sensor 14 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 1 8 Sensors continued Item Description Item Description PS3 Cassette media presence sensor PS451 Paper feeder cassette media presence sensor NOTE PS451 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4 PS4 Face down tray media full sensor PS8001 Rear door sensor PS205 Tray 1 multipurpose tray media presence PS8008 Paper feeder media feed sensor sensor NOTE PS8008 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4 PS215 Top of Page TOP
61. as staples or self adhesive notes that must be removed e Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller access cover inside the document feeder is closed e Make sure that the top document feeder cover is closed e The pages might not be placed correctly Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the stack e The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly Make sure that the paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack e The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages Make sure the paper stack fits below the guides in the input tray and remove pages from the output bin e Verify that there are no pieces of paper staples paper clips or other debris in the paper path e Clean the documentfeeder rollers and the separation pad Use compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water If misfeeds still occur replace the rollers e From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Supplies button Check the status of the documentfeeder kit and replace it if necessary ENWW Solve paper handling problems 287 Use manual print modes Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image quality problems Select a manual print mode 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the f
62. at the end of the product s life ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 347 HP LaserJet print supplies It s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use free of charge with HP Planet Partners Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet toner cartridge and supplies package You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately HP is committed to providing inventive high quality products and services that are environmentally sound from product design and manufacturing to distribution customer use and recycling When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program we ensure your HP LaserJet toner cartridges are recycled properly processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials it will not be returned to you Thank you for being environmentally responsible NOTE Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet toner cartridges only Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges non HP cartridges refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to hitp www hp com recycle Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclos
63. blank pages Yes This option disables Smart Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if it is printed on only one side This might be preferable for certain jobs that use paper types such as letterhead or prepunched paper Override A4 Letter Yes Prints on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4 size paper is loaded in the No product or to print on A4 paper when a letter size job is sent but no letter size paper is loaded This option will also override A3 with ledger size paper and ledger with A3 size paper Network Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Network Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 25 Network Settings menu First level Values Description 1 O Timeout Range 5 300 sec Use to set the I O timeout period in seconds I O timeout refers to the elapsed time before Default 15 a print job fails If the stream of data that the product receives for a print job gets interrupted this setting indicates how long the product will wait before it reports that the job has failed Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details These menus have the same structure If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot then both menus are available ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 165 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu
64. continued continued Third level Description Not currently functional This item allows the product to initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on For example the user is prompted to configure first time settings like date time language and other settings Check this item so that it is enabled for the next time the product power is turned on When the product power is turned on the next time this item is unchecked so that the pre configured settings are used during configuration and the first time setting prompt is not used Embedded JetDirect Off Check the Embedded JetDirect Off item to disable the embedded Jetdirect By default this item is unchecked so that Jetdirect is always enabled WiFi Accessory Check the WiFi Accessory item to enable the WiFi accessory Table 2 6 Preboot menu options 6 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Diagnostic items are useful for troubleshooting formatter problems Use the options below the Do Not Run item to continued help troubleshoot formatter problems Short Long Disk Do Not Run Short Long Optimized Raw Smart ICB CPB Interconnect Run Selected Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to access the product remotely to troubleshoot issues Stop Telnet Refresh IP 58 Chapter 2 Solve problem
65. device ENWW Solve fax problems 313 Are you using a phone company voice messaging service or an answering machine If the rings to answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings to answer setting for the fax accessory the messaging service answers the call and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes If the rings to answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service the fax accessory answers all calls Does your phone line have a call waiting feature If the fax telephone line has an activated call waiting feature a call waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress which causes a communication error Ensure that a call waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line 314 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Check fax accessory status If the analog fax accessory does not appear to be functioning print a Configuration page report to check the status 1 From the Home screen scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages e Configuration page 3 Touch the Print button to print the report or touch the View button to view the report on the screen The report consists of several pages 6 NOTE The product IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page On the Fax Accessory Page of the Configuration Page under the Hardware Information heading check the Modem Status The following table
66. downloading upgrade again 198 30 01 43 Scan memory failure To continue turn off then on 199 30 01 YY Scanner failure To continue turn off then on 00006 199 30 WX YZ Scanner fan failure To continue turn off then on 200 31 01 47 Document feeder not detected cecceeesseessseeeeees 200 31 03 22 Scanner calibration failure cccccccccccecceceeeeceeeeeeeees 200 31 13 03 Document feeder pick error ccccceseeeeeeeseteteeeeees 200 31 WX 10 Scanner failure To continue turn off then on 6 201 31 WX 15 Jam in document feeder cccceessccceeeeessssseeeeeeeees 201 33 WX YZ Used board disk installed ccccceeceeceecceeeceseeees 201 40 00 01 USB I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK 202 40 00 02 Embedded O buffer overflow To continue touch FONE italia chasers E meatier S 202 40 00 03 EIO lt X gt buffer overflow To continue touch OK 202 40 00 04 EIO lt X gt bad transmission To continue touch OK 202 40 00 05 Embedded I O bad transmission To continue touch OK a E EE setter ge ose ww evans E otra be E EON 203 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in Tray lt X gt ceeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 203 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in Tray lt X gt To use another tray touch IPH OMS oats cous ie va Seiten e aaa Dav ae EE tus Dodie oad ENN 203 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in Tray lt X gt ccccesscscecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 204
67. ek Penden eee WPA 0 Clear jams in the rear door and the fuser area cececceeeeceececeeceeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeesseeeeees 0 Clear jams in the duplexer sco veavazsticeiutasands sredeiuutetiad elvestevmrtduen eaicatenetaetecuaih mance 0 Jam causes and solutions anssen oie ea neh ee ate ee 0 Solve paper handling problems sisi csiccisednsscasavdvevs sianinn re oacttbaeboaatyduviouehionay diane duawonsetonenerawetys 0 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ccccccceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeetaes 0 The product does not pick up paper s c c rare iren wien cera wae een 0 The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper c0eee 0 Use manual print modes sc harshactdvacharncuadiaeien ade vasesie acsaear seine atemer aud tecuads atenueineracananses 0 Solve image quality pro blems 7 3 sacssagiar eae ncenenrder eH re eae 0 Image defect examples veisiciniiisdiasnonwerunisregaidadaivbosidiiouseistousbouuaeisiambbiais duces 0 Clean HiesProcuel teats tiotcvsdeaasessns catia bes aa a talad a bi aerate a 0 Print accleaning page enren nii ee A taate eee eee AAA 0 Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges ceccccceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeetseeeeetees 0 Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder 0 ceeeeee 0 Solve perormance problems inienn A al ait tle acento et atn eaan 0 Solve connectivity problems csi cvudcovnes orbs tra iuonehasiwouceoplamorawaess us trseinsa ublied
68. end of the page after feeding scanning is complete e Paper present sensor Detects whether a document is present in the ADF If paper is present in the ADF when copies are made the product scans the document using the ADF If no paper is present when copies are made the product scans the document using the scanner glass Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW e Deskew sensor Detects the top of the page as it enters the deskew rollers e Path sensor 1 Detects the top of the page as it approaches the ADF glass ADF paper path The ADF feeds documents past the ADF glass for scanning Figure 1 33 ADF path for single sided documents 1 Separation pad 5 ADF input tray 2 Pickup roller 6 Delivery duplex feed rollers 3 Stack stop 7 ADF glass 4 Pre pick roller 8 ADF feed rollers For two sided documents the delivery rollers reverse the direction of each page to feed the second side of the document past the ADF glass ENWW Scanning image capture system 47 Figure 1 34 ADF path for two sided documents 2 NOTE Callouts in Figure 1 34 ADF path for two sided documents on page 48 are identical to callouts in Figure 1 33 ADF path for single sided documents on page 47 Stapler stapling models only The product includes a stapler capable of stapling 20 sheets of 75 g m 20 lb paper The stapler is powered by a 24v connection from the DC controller Because there are no logic connections to the
69. failed To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message Internal disk file system is full To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Internal disk is write protected To clear touch Clear ENWW Description The internal disk is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message Tools for troubleshooting 233 Internal disk not found Description The product cannot find the hard drive Recommended action Check the hard drive cable connections Internal disk not functional Description The product internal disk is not working correctly Recommended action 1 Turn off the product and then remove and reinstall the disk Turn on the product 2 If the error persists replace the internal hard drive Internal disk not initialized To clear touch Clear Description This file storage component must be initialized before use Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system Internal disk spinning up Description Internal disk device is spinning up its platter Jobs that require disk access must wait Recommended action
70. fax send errors Print only after fax receive errors Fax V 34 Normal Use to disable V 34 modulations if Off several fax failures have occurred or if phone line conditions require it Fax Speaker Mode Normal Used by a technician to evaluate and Diagnostic diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations Fax Log Entries On The standard fax log includes basic off information such as the time and whether the fax was successful The setailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the standard fax log Print Quality Pages Fuser Test Page Print Use to print pages that help you resolve problems with print quality Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensors Select from a list of the product sensors Initiates a test of the paper path sensors Paper Path Test Print Test Page 180 Chapter 2 Solve problems Table 2 27 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Source Tray Select from a list of the available trays Generates a test page for testing paper handling features You can define the path that is used for the test in order to test specific paper paths Output Bin All bins Face down Face up Test Duplex Path Off On Number of Copies Range 1 500 Default 1 Sets the default number of copies for a copy job This default applies when the Copy or Quick Co
71. for telecom fax Products ccccescceeeeseeecenceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeesaeeeetaees EU Statement for Telecom Operation oe siedeisceeveteweaieetuntanirmate amen New Zealand Telecom Statements ssssceeseeccececceeeeeeeesesaesesueesensseeeseeseeceseceeenees Additional FCC statement for telecom products US c cccccesseeeeeeeeneeeeeetteeeeeeeaes Telephone Consumer Protection Act US ccc ccccesssceeeneeeeeeseeeessseeeeseeaeeeeseeeeneaaes Industry Canada CS 03 requirements visisnidusniontiaiadaseanvddinchaesdaiinmtwedaheaueninwenaineunneuees Vietnam Telecom wired wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products Japan Telecom Mark menera tu echt nt to eae noeaa eda pean Gone eee REG ENWW xvii xviii ENWW 1 Theory of operation e Basic operation e Formatter control system e _Engine control system e I mage formation system e Pickup feed and delivery system e Tray 1 or Tray 2 e Additional tray e Scanning image capture system ENWW 2 Basic o peration Major systems The product contains the following systems Engine control system Laser scanner system Image formation system Media feed system Option Product block diagram Figure 1 1 Product block diagram LASER SCANNER SYSTEM IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Chapter 1 MEDIA FEED SYSTEM OPTION Theory of operation ENWW Sequence of operation The DC contr
72. formation process lt ccusseniciscresernnsiiensitewesvntadquanivnadiiaivaiiedyanedensiitagnssatndis dns eenens 29 Latent image formation stage 1 2 lt 0i vaiserecvarueevesabeceieuxertvewteeeerevnen eeeateberniee 30 Primary charging sesinin ioeie a ee o ei 30 Laser beam exposure vas semriasirddarvincin arb lonsiadennphernsabbstesnietiecesssinnts 30 Deyel ping Sag sernir en ae a ana EES 31 Toner catidge smenio a e E a 31 Transfer stage suegre E Ea A Ea RaSh 32 FUSING STAGE miesies eri E EE EE E N EE NES 32 SGML SEDGE serioena iea e a i E E 33 Toner UI nederen ae E E E E E eatieteeeenentes 34 Pickup feed and delivery sy steint c csiac dace deiesseevidesdenana nacsmeraeaiiGaier uname 35 POPer Mays omenana N A 35 Photo sensors and switches ssssssseisseessstsetssserssrersstrsstrrssttstersrerssrssstesstersstrsntet 36 Solenoids and clutches ane ne sone en Seren ee ae Nan area nee nn nna Ren me rrr 38 Tray l or ay 2 irespeto peee a e e A a a e e e a e a eae 40 Pickup and feed unit tsacsetarrasesathtenaiiansmadarehieubdeatedseaasineabbsachavan aiaeepeeiemntuadaes 40 Cassette paper size detection cassette paper detection ccceeeeceeeeseees 40 Cassette BIC i UD snno n n E E 40 Tray 1 paper pickup ocsascohtusnts tea nsansurrtaneltevenniands waeniagaebuwenitancbendenensesebiedbaniaueinaaee 40 Paper pickup and feed 25s ticsvetaewncsveceaaueenesap no aioe earn onan enete 41 Jam SSC ON sgeine a e E A E 42 Additional
73. functioning Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely 4 Reconnect the corresponding connector e MP tray Connector J85 J90 on the MP tray paper out sensor and the connector J107 on the DC controller PCA e Input tray Connectors J on the tray paper out sensor and the connector J131 on the DC controller PCA e 1 X 500 sheet paper feeder tray Connector J55D on the paper feeder tray paper out sensor and the connector J106 on the paper feeder controller PCA Load Tray lt X gt Type Size To use another tray touch Options Description This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded and other paper trays are available for use It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires Recommended action 1 Load the correct paper in the tray 2 If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise touch the OK button to select another tray 236 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Manually feed output stack Then touch OK to print second sides Description The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side Recommended action The even numbered pages of the two sided document have printed Follow the next steps to print the odd numbered pages 1 Maintaining the same orientation
74. has occurred ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 215 216 Recommended action 57 00 01 Fan motor 1 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the front lower left corner of the product If no noise is heard replace the power supply fan FM1 2 If this part has been removed or replaced check the connector J119 on the DC controller PCA 3 Measure the voltage between the connectors J1 19 1 and J119 3 on the DC controller PCA immediately after the product power is turned on If the voltage changes from 0 VDC to approximately 24 VDC replace the fan FM1 57 00 02 Fan motor 2 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the front lower right corner of the product If no noise is heard replace the toner cartridge fan FM2 2 If this part has been removed or replace check the connector J26 on the toner cartridge fan connector J262 on the high voltage power supply lower and the connector J114 on the DC controller 3 Measure the voltage between the connectors J262 1 and J262 3 on the high voltage power supply lower immediately after the product power is turned on If the voltage changes from O VDC to approximately 24 VDC replace the fan FM2 57 00 03 Fan motor 3 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on Listen for fan noise at the lower back center of the product If no noise is heard replace the delivery fan FM3 2 If this part has been r
75. hole in the right rear lower corner If the fan is operating you should feel air being drawn into the product When this fan is operational the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly After the fan is operating the main motor turns on unless the right or front cover is open a jam condition is sensed or the paper path sensors are damaged You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on If the fan and main motor are operating correctly the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine formatter and control panel problems Perform an engine test If the formatter is damaged it might interfere with the engine test If the engine test page does not print try removing the formatter 62 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW and then performing the engine test again If the engine test is then successful the problem is almost certainly with the formatter the control panel or the cable that connects them If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product check the following items 1 Make sure that the product is connected directly into an active electrical outlet not a power strip that delivers the correct voltage 2 Make sure that the power switch is in the on position 3 Make sure that the fan runs briefly which indicates that the power supply is operational 4 Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected 5 Make sure that the formatter
76. i ie aa 333 HP anticounterfeit Web SiS 20 cessecoceaevs avers aennieed annsseualevecesninavasdvetiesdatncnemoianmmnaenedsaedtaton 334 Data stored on the toner cartridge sd niasrderacndrrivdraniaeanannan nanan wnneanunannes 335 ENWW XV End User License Agreement c iccnccivssessetavecsnsecstnsestnccnescecmnistanathenmnndisnisedatannedcnetinangvanaresennes 336 Opens sh gs radcisetodsnneeieeieienterteds E T E E E EE E E E OE 339 Customer self repair warranty service sivissiseseiesssadeiseaiidonracdatmeloinaiialdenentsaaebnonemedlbnmcmaetanendiiaae 340 Customer SUPPONI orrea n e E N E E E E E E E E 341 Appendix B Product specifications sasiissscicssscsessisssscsessssvessscensessesucessassssdsassdesdesesnsccaesesncesns 343 Physical specications seissy iiai ei E aE E E aa ESERE E IS E R E i ai ee 344 Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions cseceeeeteeeeteeeeneeeenees 344 Environmental specifications gin cy Seed esi dateh dd soir ive et dinar it Anh sR eho bn ele ded 344 Appendix C Regulatory information cccccccccccsssccccsssssceeeccsccccesecsseeseseccssssecsssesseeens 345 FCC reg lationS conch iapruveroeten tare cit te amine na R tener E eae eno 346 Environmental product stewardship program ccsccccceeeeseeceesceeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeentneeeeeenaaes 347 Protecting the environment 12L4sanshrvecdenngrudadionsaepa nines dialshumnahannteisan tees boxed babieontvioaxidags 347 ZONE pr
77. identifies the status conditions and possible solutions Ey NOTE If the Fax Accessory Page does not print there might be a problem with the analog fax accessory If you are using LAN fax or Internet fax those configurations could be disabling the feature Operational Enabled The analog fax accessory is installed and ready Operational Disabled The fax accessory is installed but you have not configured the required fax settings yet The fax accessory is installed and operational however the HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax When LAN fax is enabled the analog fax feature is disabled Only one fax feature either LAN fax or analog fax can be enabled at a time NOTE If LAN fax is enabled the Fax feature is unavailable on the product control panel Non Operational Enabled Disabled The product has detected a firmware failure Upgrade the firmware Damaged Enabled Disabled The fax accessory has failed Reseat the fax accessory card and check for bent pins If the status is still DAMAGED replace the analog fax accessory card 1 ENABLED indicates that the analog fax accessory is enabled and turned on DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled analog fax is turned off ENWW Solve fax problems 315 General fax problems Problem The fax failed to send Cause JBIG is enabled and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capab
78. loss 30 01 23 Scanner calibration failure Description The scanner calibration failed Recommended action 1 Turn the product off then on again 2 After the product warms up repeat the calibration process 3 If the error persists replace the scanner 30 01 36 Upgrade Error Try downloading upgrade again Description Scanner firmware upgrade error 198 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Resend the scanner firmware upgrade 2 If the error persists replace the scanner control board 30 01 43 Scan memory failure To continue turn off then on Description A scan memory error occurred Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Remove the formatter and then reinstall the formatter 3 If the error persists replace the formatter 30 01 YY Scanner failure To continue turn off then on ENWW Description gt 30 01 06 event code Scanner fan error gt 30 01 41 event code Internal communication error involving the copy processor board CPB on the formatter gt 30 01 42 event code Internal communication error Recommended action o 30 01 06 event code 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the fan and reconnect any loose cables 3 If the error persists replace the fan or the scanner control board o gt 30 01 41 event code 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Reseat the formatter 3 If the error persists replace the formatter o gt 30 01 42 eve
79. operation A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box Names and numbers can both display depending on where they are from The fax address book lists names and all other databases list numbers This is normal operation A one page fax prints as two pages A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax pushing text to a second page A jam is in the document feeder To print a one page fax on one page set the overlay header to overlay mode or adjust the fitto page setting Clear the jam and send the fax again The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low Chapter 2 Solve problems The volume setting needs to be adjusted Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu ENWW Use Fax over VoIP networks VoIP technology converts the analog phone signal into digital bits These are then assembled into packets which travel on the Internet The packets are converted and transmitted back to analog signals at or near the destination Transmission of information on the Internet is digital instead of analog Therefore there are different constraints on the fax transmission that might require different fax settings than the analog Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Fax is very dependent upon timing and signal quality so a fax transmission is more sensi
80. options 288 Print Settings menu control panel 155 Print Test Page 117 printing modes manual 288 stop for testing 94 troubleshooting 303 problem solving black page 295 Index 367 blank page 290 blurred print 297 curled paper 295 dropouts 292 event log messages 253 gray background 293 image defects 290 light print 290 lines 292 lines horizontal 292 295 lines vertical 295 messages types of 186 networks 173 repeating defects 294 repetitive images 297 scattered lines 296 skewed pages 294 smeared toner 293 specks 291 text quality 294 297 tire tracks 296 white spots 296 wrinkled paper 295 Process Cleaning Page 183 R rear door jams 273 recycling 348 electronic hardware 350 HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 348 repeating defects problem solving 294 297 replace supplies message 242 Reports menu control panel 114 restore factory settings 309 rollers cleaning 301 S safety statements 358 359 Scan Digital Send Settings menu control panel 130 scanner operations 46 scanner glass cleaning 298 scanner settings 307 security settings information 111 368 Index sensor tests manual cartridge door switch 75 duplexer refeed sensor 80 fuser output sensor 79 output bin full sensor 82 90 paper width sensor 1 78 rear bin sensor 81 rear cover sensor 76 TOP sensor 77 Tray 1 paper sensor 87 Tray 2 cassette sensor 89 Tray 2 papersensor 88 Tray 3 cassette sensor 92 Tray 3 feed sensor 83
81. printed The interval is measured by the number of pages printed Cleaning Size Select from a list of support sizes Select the paper size to use for the cleaning page Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page that was created by using the Create Cleaning Page menu The process takes up to 1 5 minutes Calibrate Scanner Touch Next to calibrate the device scanner Messages on the control panel display will lead you through the calibration process Clean Rollers Perform automatic cleaning for the document feeder rollers ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 183 Table 2 29 Calibration Cleaning menu continued First level Second level Values Description Clean Document Feeder Settings Low Threshold Settings Range 0 100 Configure cleaning settings for the document feeder Default 10 Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue Continue 184 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port and follow the on screen instructions Service menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Service menu The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel
82. product 5 Decrease the toner density Open the Administration menu at the product control panel Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu Decrease the Toner density setting Random image repetition If an image that appears at the top of the page in solid black repeats further AaBoCc down the page in a gray field the toner might not have been completely erased from the last job The repeated image might be lighter or darker than the field it appears in e Change the tone darkness of the field that the repeated image appears in e Change the order in which the images are printed For example have the lighter image at the top of the page and the darker image farther down the page e From your software program rotate the whole page 180 to print the lighter image first e If the defect occurs later in a print job turn the product off for 10 minutes and then turn it on to restart the print job ENWW Solve image quality problems 297 Clean the product Over time particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product This can cause print quality problems during printing Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems Clean the paper path and print cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or whenever print quality problems occur As much as possible keep the product free from dust and debris To clean the product exterior use
83. properly functioning If it is not replace the fuser motor M2 5 If this product was previously serviced check the connector J117 J123 on the DC controller PCA 6 Ifthe error persists replace the fuser W 8 Low fuser temperature 2 1 Remove and then reseat the fuser Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up N Check the product power source Make sure the power source meets product requirements Make sure this is the only device using the circuit 3 Check the connector J50 between the fuser and the product If it is damaged replace the fuser 4 If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA 5 If the error persists replace the fuser W 9 High fuser temperature 2 1 Remove and then reseat the fuser Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up N Check the product power source Make sure the power source meets product requirements Make sure this is the only device using the circuit 3 Check the connector J50 between the fuser and the product If it is damaged replace the fuser 4 If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA 5
84. sensor Engine control system 15 DC controller operations The DC controller controls the operational sequences of the product systems Figure 1 10 DC controller block diagram AC input Fan Low voltage power supply m Motor 0 E Solenoid VI Photointerrupter o o Switch High voltage 1 Accessory DC controller Laser scanner Table 1 9 DC controller controlled components Component Designator Description Motor M8001 Main motor M8002 Fuser motor Fan FM Main fan FM2 Sub fan Solenoid SL Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PS1 Face up sensor PS2 Fuser delivery sensor PS3 Cassette media presence sensor PS4 Face down tray output bin media full sensor PS205 Tray 1 multipurpose tray presence sensor PS215 Top Of Page TOP sensor 16 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW ENWW Table 1 9 DC controller controlled components continued Component Designator Description PS225 Media width sensor PS502 Duplex media feed sensor PS8001 Rear door sensor Switch SW235 Cassette presence switch NOTE PS8008 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4 SW240 Power switch SW260 Interlock switch SWw501 Cartridge door switch SW2100 Test print switch Engine control system 17 Fuser contro
85. sensor Figure 2 17 Test the Tray 3 paper sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the optional 500 sheet feeder ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 91 PS461 Tray 3 cassette sensor test Tray 3 cassette sensor SW461 1 Remove the Tray 3 cassette and then install it to activate the sensor Figure 2 18 Test the Tray 3 cassette sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response make sure that the sensor actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or missing If necessary replace the optional 500 sheet feeder 92 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS451 Tray 4 paper sensor test Tray 4 paper sensor PS451 1 Remove the Tray 4 cassette and then push on the sensor levers to activate the sensor Figure 2 19 Test the Tray 4 paper sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the optional 500 sheet feeder ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 93 PS461 Tray 4 cassette sensor test Tray 4 cassette sensor PW461 1 Remove the Tray 4 cassette and then install it to activate the sensor Figure 2 20 Test the Tray 4 cassette sensor Check the control panel display for sensor response If there is no response make sure that the sensor actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or missing If necessary replace the optional 500 sheet feeder Print stop test
86. space to process any jobs If the storage space goes lower an error condition will occur Recommended action gt Touch the View Jobs option to view and delete stored jobs o Touch the Print Faxes option to print and delete stored faxes Sign in might be required To increase available disk space go to Job Status to cancel scheduled jobs Document feeder bin full Description Too many pages are in the document feeder Recommended action Remove excess paper from the document feeder output bin Document feeder is empty ENWW Description This message displays when the user presses the Start button and there is nothing in the ADF or on the glass and the ADF is closed Recommended action Place originals in document feeder and touch the Start button Tools for troubleshooting 227 Document Feeder Kit low Description The product indicates when a supply level is low Recommended action Replace the document feeder kit Document Feeder Kit very low Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low NOTE After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the document feeder kit Document Feeder Kit very low To continue touch OK Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low NOTE After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP Premium Protection W
87. specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country region to country region state to state or province to province HP s limited warranty is valid in any country region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards HP will not alter form fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you 330 Appendix A Service and support ENWW THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU ENWW Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement 331 HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge
88. the Administration menu and then select the Manage Trays menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 24 Manage Trays menu First level Values Description Use Requested Tray Exclusively Controls how the product handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray Two First options are available Exclusively The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used even if that tray is empty First The product pulls from another tray if the specified tray is empty even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job Manually Feed Prompt Always Indicate whether a prompt should appear when the type or size for a job does not Unless loaded match the specified tray and the product pulls from the multipurpose tray instead Two options are available Always A prompt always displays before using the multipurpose tray Unless loaded A message displays only if the multipurpose tray is empty ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 163 Table 2 24 Manage Trays menu continued First level Values Description Size Type Prompt Display Controls whether the tray configuration message displays whenever a tray is closed Do not display Two options are available Display This option shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed The user is able to configure the tray settings directly from this mes
89. the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning If the error persists replace the lifter assembly 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in Tray lt X gt Description The product detected a different paper type than expected Y Expected type Z Detected type o Y 0 Yel Y 3 Unknown Normal paper LBP transparency Y 4 Glossy paper Y 5 Y 6 Y 7 Y 8 Y 9 Y A Y B Y C Y D Z 1 LaS Z A Z 5 Z 6 L Gloss film Non assured transparency Heavy paper Light paper Rough paper Extra heavy glossy paper glossy paper 3 Heavy glossy paper glossy paper 2 Heavy paper 3 Heavy paper 2 Normal paper LBP transparency Glossy paper Gloss film Non assured transparency Heavy paper 204 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW o Z 8 Light paper Z 9 Rough paper Z A Extra heavy glossy paper glossy paper 3 Z B Heavy glossy paper glossy paper 2 Z C Heavy paper 3 Z D Heavy paper 2 Recommended action 1 2 4 Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated or use another tray if available If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings Clean the paper sensor If the error persists replace the paper pickup assembl
90. the product service manual Image quality Yes 4 No gt After the print quality is acceptable see step 6 6 Can the customer print successfully from the Verify that all O cables are connected correctly and that a valid host computer IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page Interface Yes This is the end of No gt If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print the troubleshooting an event log see the control panel message section of the service process manual When the customer can print from the host computer this is the end of the troubleshooting process The basic product functions should start up when the product is connected into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position If the product does not start use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem Power on troubleshooting overview Turn on the product power If the control panel display remains blank random patterns display or asterisks remain on the control panel display perform power on checks to find the cause of the problem During normal operation the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on Place your hand over the holes in the leftside cover near the formatter If the fan is operating you will feel air passing out of the product You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating You can also place your hand over the
91. to the Manual setting use the Manual Settings menu to configure TCP Pv4 parameters Manual Settings IP Address NOTE This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu Enter the address Available only if the Config Method option is set to the Manual option Configure parameters directly from the product control panel Subnet Mask Enter the address Default Gateway Enter the address Tools for troubleshooting 167 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default IP Auto IP legacy Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP IP reconfiguration for example when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP NOTE This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network Auto IP A link local IP address 169 254 x x is set Legacy The address 192 0 0 192 is set consistent with older HP Jetdirect products Primary DNS Range 0 255 Default XXX XXX XX XX Specify the IP address n n n n of a Primary Domain Name System DNS Server Secondary DNS Range 0 255 Default 0 0 0 0 Specify the IP address n n n n of a Secondary DNS Server IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to enable or disable O
92. 00 LCD with capacitive touchscreen and adjustable viewing angle The control panel includes a USB port for walk up printing and a hardware integration pocket for third party USB devices such as card readers The control panel has a diagnostic mode to allow testing of the touchscreen home button and speaker The control panel does not require calibration Scanner The scanner is a carriage type platen scanner which includes the frame glass LED optics and a scanner controller board SCB attached to the back of the assembly The scanner has a sensor to detect legal sized media and a switch to indicate when the ADF is opened The ADF and control panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly If the scanner fails it can be replaced as a whole unit The scanner replacement part does not include the ADF SCB or control panel assembly Automatic document feed system e Simplex single pass e Duplex three pass e Legal sensing flag e Pick and feed roller assembly with separation pad e Mechanical deskew e Step glass for ADF scanning e Jam clearance door with sensing e LED indication when original is placed on input tray Sensors in the ADF 46 The ADF contains the following sensors e ADF cover sensor Detects whether the ADF cover is open or closed e Paper length sensor Detects whether there is a legal size original e Pick success sensor Detects the top of the page before sending a page through the ADF and the
93. 1 P So Cartridge door switch 3 3VC GND JEUSNS tml 3 36 GND FULLSNS 3f ay Ps1 Face up sensor J4 PS4 H Am Face down output bin media full sensor a 2 J8007DA PF media presence sensor J8007LA 3 3V GND J451 PSNS1 PS451 J405 24 glo Sut o J407 PF pickup solenoid JOPFTRAYS1 o o GND SW461 1 J461 LL PF cassette presence switch Paper feeder J406 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting Figure 2 32 General circuit diagram 2 of 2
94. 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2 Sided Format Book style Flip style Resolution 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 150 dpi 75 dpi Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Sets the resolution for sent documents Higher resolution images have more dots per inch dpi so they show more detail Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail but the file size is smaller Some file types for example a file that will be processed with OCR require a specific resolution When these file types are selected the Resolution setting might automatically change to a valid value 136 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Content Orientation Orientation Auto detect For some features to work correctly you Portrait must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation me
95. 215 connector Reconnect the connector J507 on the high voltage power supply The TOP sensor PS215 is defective Replace the sensor The media width sensor PS225 lever is defective e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the product if the sensor lever is damaged Poor contact of the media width sensor PS225 connector Reconnect the connector J513 on the high voltage power supply The media width sensor PS225 is defective Replace the sensor The fuser delivery sensor PS2 lever is defective Poor contact of the fuser delivery sensor connector e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the fuser if the sensor lever is damaged e Reconnect the connectors J22 and J24 on the transit inline connector e Reconnect the connector J1608 The fuser delivery sensor PS2 is defective Replace the fuser The duplex media feed sensor PS502 lever is defective duplex models Poor contact of the duplex media feed sensor PS502 connector duplex models The duplex media feed sensor is defective duplex models e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the high voltage power supply if the sensor lever is damaged Reconnect the connector J501 on the high voltage power supply Replace
96. 479 2010 EN62479 2010 GB4943 2001 CISPR22 2005 A1 EN55022 2006 A1 Class A 3 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 A1 A2 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 2008 GB17625 1 2003 The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex Il and Annex IV EMC Directive 2004 108 EC the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and carries the CE Marking accordingly This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 For regulatory purposes these products are assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number s 3 The product meets the requirements of EN55022 amp CNS 13438 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 352 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW Boise Idaho USA July 27 2011 For Regulatory Topics only contact European Contact Your Local Hewlett
97. 9 370 Index ENWW 2012 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com CF116 90901
98. 98 00 03 1 2 3 98 00 04 1 2 Turn the product off and then on Use the Clean disk item in the Preboot menu Reload the firmware Turn the product off and then on Rerun the file erase function lt Binname gt full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full Recommended action Empty the bin to continue printing A second USB wireless networking accessory has been detected Description This message appears on the control panel when more than one USB wireless product is attached to the product Recommended action The use of more than one wireless USB product is not supported Remove one of the wireless USB products Bad optional tray connection Description The optional tray is not connected not connected correctly or a connection is not working correctly Recommended action 1 amp NS Turn the product off Remove and reinstall the optional tray Reconnect connectors for the tray Turn the product on 222 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Black Cartridge low Description The toner cartridge is at the low condition Recommended action Actual supply life remaining may vary Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable The supply does not need to be replaced now 2 NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends Black Cartridge very l
99. Build off Job Build on Use to combine several original documents into one job Also use this feature to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time The product temporarily saves all the scanned images After you have scanned all the pages for the job touch the Finish option to finish the job ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 129 Scan Digital Send Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Scan Digital Send Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu First level Second level Third level Description E mail Settings Default Save to Network Folder Options Default Save to USB Options NOTE The same options are available for each of these features except where noted 130 Chapter 2 Solve problems E mail Setup NOTE Email Settings only E mail Setup Wizard Use to configure settings that apply to sending documents through email or saving documents to a folder on the network or on a USB flash drive The E mail Setup Wizard feature configures the product fo send scanned images as email attachments To open the product HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification server enter the product network address into a Web browser ENWW Table 2 18 Scan
100. C 8 or PC 850 are recommended for line draw characters 156 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 20 General Print Settings menu continued First level Second level Values Description Append CR to LF No Configure whether a carriage return CR is appended to each Yes line feed LF encountered in backwards compatible PCL jobs pure text no job control Select Yes to append the carriage return The default setting is No Some environments such as UNIX indicate a new line by using only the line feed control code This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed Suppress Blank Pages No This option is for users who are generating their own PCL which Yes could include extra form feeds that would cause blank pages to be printed When the Yes option is selected form feeds are ignored if the page is blank Media Source Mapping Standard Use to select and maintain input trays by number when you are Classic not using the product driver or when the software program has no option for tray selection The following options are available Standard Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models Classic Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models Default Print Options menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Default Print Options menu In the following table asterisks indicate t
101. CE CEE CEE al 7 z T1610 D a Z ol g D wl at alo lg 5 ol BE a Gl g oO A ol e i S S ol e gala 2 a3 a8 aaa 435 EENE EEE E o O ol Y e o e a e o a g z Z a H amp f al H 2 a ol ol o z x uf ef ep uf uf 2 ef MEE x S 3 4 dl 2i ol 8 Si Si S Sl S Z S L dl ZI EI a 5 StS oj QQ of of QQ oF OF o Z a 9 o x S 5 o 2 gt Sa Environment E z E x wy a A sensor N a amp 0 oj S 3507 TH3 FM1 ee L 12 J8007D mamitan 27 High voltage Power eultch J501 power supply c 12 38007L Duplex T8505 TB506 TB507 sw240 feed sensor TBOO7LA at soles Ps502 i E E ae DEV TR FSRB TITTtTTTTT alk yo ye as a E TB508 TB509 TB510 PF media i E feed sensor LED240 FILMB PAI PAZ a J8008 2 4 0 5 v sat ea PFEDS1 H d J513 J507 J107 J502 GND E sk HOS Cee Cee TE 3 3 aV ab on oH ol ol f z Paper feeder i ei s _ 3 z i 4 a SR O of i al o o F connector Sf as e N 34 z 3 2 faj B i F oj a F El PF feed clutch bee bee 3220 3210 J402 FT4 FT3 E a Ja fs fe 7 Te Paper width TOP sensor sensor RRE fal 928 are ae a H a al a PS225 PS215 REBRE REE ol S of of 3 5 ol PPP Pp l gt ko H lA 12 J8009D J8009DA 108 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Internal print quality test pages Clean the paper path 1 3 4 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button
102. DF 31 03 31 ADF feed motor is not turning 1 Verify the paper meets the product specifications 2 Make sure the input tray is not overloaded 3 Check the event log for ADF errors and resolve any errors first 4 Verify the motor cables are connected 5 Reseat ADF to scanner control board or formatter cables 6 Replace the ADF Tools for troubleshooting 257 Event log message Description Action 31 03 32 ADF deskew motor is not turning 1 Verify the paper meets the product specifications 2 Make sure the input tray is not overloaded 3 Check the event log for ADF errors and resolve any errors first 4 Verify the motor cables are connected 5 Reseat ADF to scanner control board or formatter cables 6 Replace the ADF 31 13 01 Paper pick was initiated but the page didn t 1 Open the ADF lid pull sheets back into make it fo the pick success sensor input tray and resume the job 2 Check the paper guides and make sure they are set to the correct paper width 3 Make sure the input tray is not overloaded 4 Check the ADF page count for roller life 5 Verify the paper meets the product specifications 6 Make sure the bogie door is completely closed 7 Check the event log for 31 03 30 errors and resolve those errors first 8 Clean the ADF roller 9 Install a ADF maintenance kit 31 13 02 The paper passed the pick success sensorand 1 Clear the paper path and try feeding the then jamme
103. Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional Require preview Disable preview Defines the default job options for each function If you do not specify the job options when creating the job the default options are used For complete setup go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the network address of the product into a Web browser Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job Select whether this feature is available on the product Make optional The feature is optional depending on the user who is signed in Require preview Previews are required for all users Disable preview Previews are disabled for all users ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 131 Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default File Name The product is shipped with a factory default file name of Untitled for any scanned files that are sent or saved Use this feature to specify a different default file name If you are saving a file to a network folder or USB storage product and a file with the default file name already exists a number is appended to the file name for example Untitled OO1 132 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 18 Scan Digital S
104. Event lt UVWXYZ gt gt 81 03 00 event code Access Point Wireless Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt gt 81 04 00 event code Jetdirect Inside Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt o 81 06 00 event code Internal EIO Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt o 81 07 00 event code Internal Wireless Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt o 81 08 00 event code Internal Access Point Wireless Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt o 81 09 00 event code Internal Jetdirect Inside Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Turn the product off reseat the EIO accessory and then turn the product on 3 If the error persists replace the formatter 81 YY YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on Description An external I O card has failed on the product Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Turn the product off reseat the EIO accessory and then turn the product on 3 If the error persists replace the EIO card 98 00 0X Corrupt data in X volume ENWW Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume 98 00 01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Reinstall firmware 98 00 02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Re install accessory solutions 98 00 03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Re configure the product gt 98 00 04 Corrupt data in job data volume All job data was erased Tools for troubleshooting 221 Recommended action 98 00 01 or 98 00 02 or
105. If the error persists replace the fuser 51 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on Description An error with the laser scanner assembly has occurred in the product o YY 10 Beam detect error o YY 19 Laser malfunction o YY 20 Black laser scanner error Recommended action 51 00 10 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the flat flexible cable FFC connections to the laser scanners 212 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3 Check connectors J111 and J110 at the DC controller and check connectors J503 and J501 at the laser scanners 4 Replace the laser scanner 51 00 19 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the connectors on the laser scanner 3 Replace the laser scanner 51 00 20 1 Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu Verify that you can hear the motor rotate 2 Ifyou cannot hear the motor rotate verify that connector J1702 and J1505 are fully seated on the DC controller PCA Verify that the connector J12 on the laser scanner assembly is securely attached 4 Ifthe error persists replace the black laser scanner 52 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on Description A scanner rotation error has occurred Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Turn the product off and then on Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu If the component tests showed a startup failure reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor J56 and J58 an
106. If the product has been turned off and then on again since the most recent print job then the page will print from Tray 2 The product continuously prints test pages as long as the test page switch is depressed The product will not print a test page if it is in Sleep mode Print formatter test pages If the engine test was successful with the formatter removed reinstall the formatter and then print a configuration page to test the functionality of the formatter 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Print Quality Pages e Fuser Test Page 3 Touch the Print button 70 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams To isolate a problem specify which input tray to use specify whether to use the duplex path and specify the number of copies to print Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature e Print Test Page Run the paper path test from the default settings Tray 2 no duplex and one copy To specify other settings scroll down the menu and select the setting and then scroll back up and select Print Test Page to start the test Source Tray Select Tray 1 Tray 2 or the optional tray Output Bin Select All bins Fa
107. K X RASTER BoA EA ae BE J ts F SJ T11363 2006 PIRHI BEAK TE SIA RY SPR iE A BR Fe ARE CE E i i BE PV BE REP BREE A PT PEAY aa Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Turkey T rkiye Cumhuriyeti EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Ukraine O6nagHauHa Bignosinae BUMOTOM TexHiyHoro PemMamedHTy LOO O6Me gt KeHHA BUKOPUCTOHHA QEAKNX He6ez3neyHnx PEYOBHH B CNEKTPUYHOMY TA ENEKTPDOHHOMY o6napHaHhi 3OTBEPPP gt KEHOFO NMOCTOAHOBOHO Kabinety Minictpis Ykpaixn sig 3 rpyAHa 2008 Ne 1057 ENWW Safety statements 361 Additional statements for telecom fax products EU Statement for Telecom Operation This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks PSTN of European Economic Area EEA countries regions It meets requirements of EU R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex II and carries appropriate CE conformity marking For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point Network compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN Please follow the instructions provided in
108. LUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com OpenSSL 339 Customer self repair warranty service HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair CSR parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement If during the diagnosis period HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement There are two categories of CSR parts 1 Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service 2 Parts for which customer self repair is optional These parts are also desig
109. May eesse E eE Fee eT EE eR ee Sern O EEE OE 43 Tray driver Payee escapee pense a in E E a ene 43 Paper pickup and feed incimipimnjeniiore a R E TE 44 Paper level and size detection ccccccccesecceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceneeeeeceseeeesseneeeeensaeees 45 J m defection narren appeal unt a gee h a eased Gente Tand Tae Gun Ont oegoia as 45 Scanning image capture system os csssaniseacaiscneyaslcatie atl iiceaiubdnanbauevasanns ei daineonihnnniiieoduinbaceineae neswlnasoiael 46 Conirolipanel enrete E E E E E EE AEEA 46 SCONIMEL nE EE E S EE E E A A EE 46 Automatic document feed system s sssnssenneesoeeeeseeesreetsrentrsorereresesettnsrerrnrererrerereres nnt 46 Sensors in the ADF reece nei kne e ar E E E Aa 46 ADF pap r path cautaechanataranadenvisete A E ETS 47 Stapler stapling models only seisoisasssarnssaninnstderranareanensbesasvneaweberianertacntaes 48 2 GOING problems ssis aeree A E E 49 Solve problems checklist isosiisicssinrssiinieinsineini inie Wl tye bua i i 50 Men Mapes reiii arn nanea e i a Ea e E a nE E EEEE E EE E ei i EEEE 52 Preboot menu Ss PilCNS i damp rolsjaccdeanndisayn cheno vorsuunaniarnsapnentodnnderandeebonundunianiaea dn apiderwaieniaens 53 CURE NT setings pages crosier nE e EA EA e E e vubreelstion R E E Galewebi 60 Troubleshooting proC sS x cctcnesawen cnannwtiwentvceeaeiri tat tio irri fiii E einn i E E E ani EENES 6l Determine the problem source ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeceeeeeeeeee
110. NWW Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message USB storage file system is full To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Used supply in use Description One or more used supplies have been installed Recommended action o Install new supplies o If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterfeit Any repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available Used supply installed To continue touch OK Description The product displays this message when a used supply a remanufactured or refilled genuine HP or non HP product has been installed gt 10 00 34 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action o Install new supplies o If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply go to www hp com go anticounterteit Any repair required as a result of using used cartridges is not covered under warranty Supply status and features depending on supply status are not available Warming up scanner ENWW Description The scanner is warming up Recommended action The product will enter the ready state when it is finished warming up Tools for troubleshooting 251 Wireless Configuratio
111. Orientation Orientation 126 Chapter 2 Solve problems Portrait Landscape For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top ENWW Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description 2 Sided Format Book style If you are making two sided copies select a 2 Flip style sided format option Book style original Flip style copy Flip style original Book style copy Book style The back side of the original is printed rightside up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Book style original Flip style copy The back side of the original is printed right side up but the back side of the copy is printed upside down Use this option when the original is bound along the left edge but you want the copies to be bound along the top edge Flip style original Book style copy The back side of the original is printed upside down but the back side of
112. Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Hewlett Packard GmbH HQ TRE Herrenberger Stra e 140 71034 B blingen Germany www hp eu certificates USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 ENWW Declaration of conformity 353 Declaration of conformity fax models Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 1107 01 Rel 1 0 Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525f Regulatory Model BOISB 1107 01 Including BOISB 0703 00 Fax Module Product Options All Toner Cartridges CE255A CE255X conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY IEC 60950 1 2005 EN60950 1 2006 A11 A1 IEC 60825 1 2007 EN 60825 1 2007 Class 1 Laser LED Product IEC 62479 2010 EN62479 2010 GB4943 2001 EMC CISPR22 2005 A1 EN55022 2006 A1 Class A 3 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 55024 1998 A1 A2 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Issue 4 GB9254 2008 GB17625 1 2003 TELECOM ES 203 021 FCC Title 47 CFR Part 684 Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Annex IV EMC Directive 2004 108 EC the Low Voltage Directiv
113. Tray 2 cassette use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor through the small slot toward the front of the product Top sensor PS215 RM1 8617 O00CN Top sensor PCA PS215 Top Open the cartridge door remove the toner cartridge raise the registration shutter and then use a screwdriver to activate the sensor Paper width sensor PS225 RM1 8618 O00CN Paper width sensor PCA PS225 Paper Width 1 Open the cartridge door remove the toner cartridge and then lift the registration flap to activate the sensor Fuser delivery sensor Duplex media feed sensor PS2 PS502 RM1 8505 000CN RM1 8519 000CN Fuser universal HVPS PS2 Fuser Output PS502 Duplexer Refeed Open the rear door and then use a screwdriver to activate the sensor Remove the Tray 2 cassette push the green button to drop the duplex tray and then raise the tray Tools for troubleshooting 73 Table 2 10 Manual sensor tests continued Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement part Description Paper path sensor Testing of sensor name number number test name Paper feeder media PS8008 CE530 69001 Tray 4 feeder unit PS8008 Tray 4 Feed Remove the Tray 4 feed sensor Tray 4 sensor cassette use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor through the small slot toward the front of the product Rear cover open sensor PS1 WG8 8519 000CN Photointerrupter PS1 Rear door Lift the face down tray outp
114. Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position The test can also be programmed to stop from O to 60 000 ms If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job print time you can recover the product in one of two ways ae gt e S P From the Home screen scroll to and touch the Administration button Touch the Troubleshooting button Touch the Diagnostic Tests button Scroll to and touch the Print Stop Test button Enter a range and then touch the OK button 94 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 12 Print stop settings Duration O msecs Description The leading edge of the paper stops about 10 mm 0 36 in beyond the silver paper guide of the registration assembly 100 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops about 24 mm 0 94 in beyond the silver paper guide of the registration assembly 500 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops prior to the paper entering the nip of the fuser assembly the nip is the gap between the pressure roller and the hot fusing roller 1000 msecs 1200 msecs 1 500 msecs 2 500 msecs 3 000 msecs The leading edge of the paper stops about 55 mm 2 17 in beyond the fuser assembly
115. WARNING If you believe the overcurrent or overvoltage protection circuits have been activated do not connect the product power cable or turn on the product power until the cause of the failure is found and corrected In addition two fuses in the low voltage power supply protect against overcurrent If overcurrent flows into the AC line the fuses melt and cut off the power distribution For safety reasons the product interrupts power 24 V to the main motor and high voltage power supply The interloct switch is turned off to interrupt power when the cartidge door opens SW 260 is turned off The AC voltage remains present in the product when the power switch is in the off position Disconnect the power cable when disassembling the product NOTE An accidental electrical short while servicing the product can result in a loss of power to the product causing the control panel to shut down blank out Turn the product power off and then unplug the power cord Wait at least 15 minutes before plugging the power cord in and turning the product power on ENWW Engine control system 23 24 High voltage power supply The high voltage power supply HVPS applies biases to the following components e Primary charging roller e Developing roller e Transfer roller e Fusing film Figure 1 14 High voltage power supply Engine controller unit _ High voltage power supply Fuser Wer Fuser film Fuser film bias Pressure roller circu
116. XXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the 362 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area This equipment uses the following USOC jacks RJ11C An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or pro
117. a soft water moistened cloth Print a cleaning page Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the fuser if you are having any of the following problems e Specks of toner are on the printed pages e Toner is smearing on the printed pages e Repeated marks occur on the printed pages Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Open the following menus e Calibration Cleaning e Cleaning Page 3 Touch the Print button to print the page 4 The cleaning process can take several minutes When it is finished discard the printed page Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges Over time specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing which can affect performance Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing 298 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 1 Press the power button to turn off the product and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet 2 Open the scanner lid ENWW Clean the product 299 300 Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing by using a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner Dry the glass and white plastic backing by using a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting CAUTION Do not use abrasives acetone benzene am
118. ackard GmbH HQ TRE Herrenberger Stra e 140 71034 B blingen Germany www hp eu certificates USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise Idaho 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 ENWW Declaration of conformity fax models 355 Certificate of Volatility 356 Figure C 1 Certificate of Volatility 1 of 2 Hewlett Packard Certificate of Volatility Model HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525 Series Part Number M525dn CF 116A f CF117A Address Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Blvd Boise ID 83714 Volatile Memory Does the device contain volatile memory Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed KI Yes J No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type SRAM DRAM etc DDR2 DRAM Size User Modifiable 1GB O Yes KJ No Function Used for temporary storage during the process of jobs and for applications that are running on the OS Steps to clear memory When the printer is powered off the memory is erased Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory O Yes O No Type SRAM DRAM etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory O Yes O No Non Volatile Memory Does the device contain non volatile memory Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed X Yes J No If Yes
119. ady status If an error message displays resolve the error 3 Check the cabling a Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port Make sure that the connection is secure b Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable if possible c Check the network connection 4 Ensure that the selected paper size and type meet specifications Also open the Trays menu on the product control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type and size 5 Print a configuration page If the product is connected to a network an HP Jetdirect page also prints a From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button b Open the following menus o Reports Configuration Status Pages e Configuration page c Touch the Print button to print the page If the pages do not print check that at least one tray contains paper If the page jams in the product follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam If the page does not print correctly the problem is with the product hardware If the page prints correctly then the product hardware is working The problem is with the computer you are using with the print driver or with the program 6 Verify that you have installed the print driver for this product Check the program to make sure that you are using the print driver for this product The print driver is on
120. against the paper e Verify the paper meets the product specifications e Use the control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured properly Event log message Description Action 30 01 08 The flatbed optical assembly cannot find the This is an informational message and no origin notch action is required If the flatbed optical assembly cannot find the origin notch on the flatbed scanner the scanned image might be offset on the copied page The image displacement will be less then 1 mm or pixel off 30 01 41 The formatter lost connections with the 1 Turn the product off and then on scanner control board or communication was corrupted 2 Reseat the formatter 3 Upgrade the firmware 4 Verify that the PCI express cable is connected to the product and to the interconnect board formatter and scanner control board 5 Verify the scanner control board has power 6 Replace the scanner control board 7 Replace the formatter 8 Replace the interconnect board 9 Replace the whole unit 30 01 43 Copy processor board memory check failure 1 Turn the product off and then on during the initial memory check The copy processor board resides on the scanner 2 Replace the scanner control board control board or formatter depending on the hef product 3 Replace the formatter 30 01 44 Scanner firmware error 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Replace the scanner control bo
121. agement sensor SR11 is properly functioning The sensor is located inside the main drive assembly and cannot be reached for testing Disconnect the connector J112 at the DC controller while in manual sensor test mode to verify the sensor operation If it is not operating replace the main drive assembly If the product was previously serviced check the intermediate connector J87 of the developing disengagement sensor the connector J112 on the DC controller PCA the connector J38 of the developing disengagement motor and the connector J261 on the high voltage power supply D PCA alienation mechanism failure Make sure that the ITB is correctly installed Use the T1 roller alienation sensor SRY test in the manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning If it is not replace the sensor assembly Use the T1 roller engagement and disengagement drive test in the component test to verify that the T1 roller disengagement mechanism is properly functioning If it is not remove the ITB and 218 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4 manually actuate the alienation mechanism If it fails replace the ITB If the ITB is working correctly replace the fuser drive assembly If the product was previously serviced check the connector J128 on the DC controller PCA 59 05 50 Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a drum motor startup error Recommended action 1 2 Perform th
122. alled To continue touch OK Description One or more genuine HP supplies designed for a different product are installed These supplies are not supported by the product The product may either shut down or slow down Recommended action The installed supply was not designed for this product and is not supported Results may vary when used with this product To continue printing with the unsupported supply touch the OK button 248 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Unsupported tray configuration Description More than the allowable tray accessories are installed on the product Printing cannot continue until the extra trays are removed and the product is turned off and then on Recommended action Turn product off and remove the excess tray accessories Turn the product on Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non supported USB accessory has been installed Recommended action Turn the product off remove the USB accessory and then turn the product on Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on Description The firmware upgrade is complete Recommended action Turn the product off and then on USB accessory needs too much power Remove USB and turn off then on Description A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current Printing cannot continue Recommended action Remove the USB accessory and then turn the product off and then on Use a USB accessory that uses less power
123. an een ea ia eii i aai ED 352 Declaration of conformity fax models nnnnnnnnnneennoeseneesonersrnssssettreetrssreersreetrrnenssrrnseerersene 354 Ceniticate of Volatility ressis 356 afei statemieniS riski kaussi esea iai en a waded eaaa i e A E 358 LISS SCTE angene a e a a A OE 358 Canadian DOC regulations ion pacesiapanieapieaendaei ncaa ae aa on areaonnnredee 358 VCCI statement Japan voces ssiviceGecsepaciiasion s ie ee e i REE o 358 Power cord InsirUchonS siseosas nia aeaa aa aE A EEA a e a 358 xvi ENWW Power cord statement Japan cccccsseesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecsesseessetseeeeeseeeessaes EMC statement China lt atacssccnenseerreratiG ene niaere neo nie eee mane EMC statement KOreG s iscoveecntsnntecinacnonansimaepateowenndeddeunsabemeusdvenassgudeveentvessendunene EMI statement Taiwan cccccceccccceecceceeeceeseeeceeseeceeeseceeeeueceesseeceesseeeeeueeeeeaaeeeees Laser statement for Finland 2 iy seyieedeonaairariener aan tongiieeiearbenndmmns Meneame GS statement Germany spessi chnchatasnsgdapneiscaonbhdasansdgancthenatoganengadbetavdenascabsaeunennanees Substances Table China wnisscoivesonssononahspiebiansiawarnawied cnmbsitantidadgnuedyslebiwesivuxaseadsrainutnnnns Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Turkey cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeees Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement Ukraine cccccceeessssssseeeeeeeeceeeeess Additional statements
124. ans the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top In the Orientation area select whether the original document has a portrait or landscape orientation Landscape 2 Sided Format Book style Use to configure the default style for 2 Flip style sided print jobs If the Book style option is selected the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 137 Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Color Black Original Size Automatically detect Color Black Gray Black Selelct from a list of supported sizes Use to enable or disable color scanning Automatically detect Automatically scans documents in color if at least one page has color Color Scans documents in color Black Gray Scans documents in grayscale Black Scans documents in black and white with a compressed file size Use to describe the page size of the original document Notification Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Configure to receive not
125. ant to use How to Connect Button Display Hide Use this menu item to display or hide the How to Connect Button on the Home screen Date and Time Inactivity Timeout Show Date and Time Hide Date and Time Range 10 300 seconds Default 60 seconds Select whether to display or hide the date and time on the control panel Home screen Specifies the amount of time that elapses between any activity on the control panel and when the product resets to the default settings When the timeout expires the control panel display returns to the Home menu and any user signed in to the product is signed out Tools for troubleshooting 159 Table 2 22 Display Settings menu continued First level Clearable Warnings Continuable Events Second level Auto continue 10 seconds Touch OK to continue Description Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning displays on the control panel If the On setting is selected clearable warnings appear until the Clearable Warnings button is pressed If theJob setting is selected clearable warnings stay on the display during the job that generated the warning and disappear from the display when the next job starts Use this option to configure the product behavior when the product encounters certain errors If the Auto continue 10 seconds option is selected the job will continue after 10 seconds If theTouch OK to continue option is s
126. ard 3 Replace the formatter ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 255 Event log message Description Action 30 01 45 General code assert error for the copy 1 Turn the product off and then on processor board firmware 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Replace the scanner control board 4 Replace the scanner assembly 30 01 46 The firmware cannot find the copy processor 1 Reseat the formatter board 2 Replace the scanner control board or formatter depending on where copy processor board is located 30 03 14 Non fatal error This is an informational message and no action is required 30 03 20 The copy processor board firmware cannot 1 Turn the product off and then on communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly 2 Verify the FFC cables between scanner and scanner control board or formatter depending on product are connected 3 Replace the scanner 30 03 22 The scan module cannot see the illumination 1 Turn the product off and then on module or marginal illumination The optical assembly is not parked under the calibration 2 Upgrade the firmware strip P 3 Check the service event log for other scanner errors and resolve those errors 4 Check the scan module FFC connection 5 Replace the scanner 30 03 23 The calibration stitching label shifted or there 1 Turn the product off and then on are bad sensors in the scan module 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Replace the scanner 30 03 30 The scanner control b
127. arranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the document feeder kit Document feeder top cover open Description The document feeder jam access cover is open Recommended action Close the cover EIO lt X gt disk not functional Description The EIO disk in slot indicated is not working correctly Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated 228 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3 Install a new EIO disk 4 Turn the product on EIO lt X gt disk spinning up Description The EIO disk product in the indicated slot is spinning up Jobs that require disk access must wait o X 1 Slot 1 o X 2 Slot 2 Recommended action No action is necessary EIO device failure To clear touch Clear Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message EIO file operation failed To clear touch Clear Description A PIL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message EIO file system is full To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error EIO is write protected To clear touch Clear Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it Reco
128. ation pad if worn or deformed Dirt or scratches on the fuser delivery upper guide or the fuser e Clean the fuser delivery upper guide or fuser delivery delivery lower guide lower guide if dirt or if there is a toner build up on it e Replace the fuser if the guides are deformed or scratched The fuser delivery roller is dirty worn or deformed e Clean the fuser delivery roller if it is dirty e Replace the fuser if the fuser delivery roller is worn or deformed Fuser delivery sensor PS2 lever is defective Replace the fuser The face down tray media full sensor lever is defective e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the top cover if the sensor lever is damaged The face down delivery roller is worn or deformed Replace the face down delivery roller The fuser film or the fuser roller is defective Replace the fuser Jams in the top cover rear door fuser and duplex area residual media jam Cause Solution Residual media in the product Check the media path and remove any residual media ENWW Clearjams 283 284 Jams in the top cover rear door fuser and duplex area residual media jam Cause The TOP sensor P215 lever is defective Solution e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the product if the sensor lever is damaged Poor contact of the TOP sensor PS
129. bdl was not The firmware file is corrupt Download the performed The file is corrupt firmware file and attempt the upgrade again 99 00 02 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not The IO timed out during the firmware performed Timeout during receipt download The most common cause is an issue with the network environment Ensure a good connection to the product and attempt the upgrade again or upgrade using the USB walk up port 99 00 03 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not 1 Download the firmware again ENWW performed An error occurred when writing to the hard disk 2 If the error persists perform the clean disk format disk process 3 Download the firmware from the Preboot menu 4 If the error persists replace the hard disk Tools for troubleshooting 259 Event log message Description Action 99 00 04 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not The I O timed out during the firmware performed There was a timeout during the download The most common cause is an 99 00 05 download issue with the network environment Ensure there is a good connection to the product and attempt the firmware upgrade again or upgrade the firmware using the USB walk up port 99 00 06 Remote firmware upgrade bdl was not 1 Download the firmware again performed There was an error reading the 99 00 07 firmware file 2 If the error persists perform the clean disk format disk process 99 00 08 3
130. be damaged Replace the toner cartridge 6 The fuser film might be scratched or dirty Replace the fuser 7 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply Lines 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself Z ActBk gt a4 2 Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser AciBkxoG AdBbo ocd 3 The photosensitive drum might be scratched Replace the toner cartridge AciBkoioa 4 The fuser inlet guide might be dirty Clean the guide AciBDC G 5 The fuser film might be scratched Replace the fuser Horizontal lines 1 The photosensitive drum might be scratched Replace the toner cartridge Aa BoC e 2 The fuser film might be dirty or damaged Replace the fuser Aa BbC c ma DUT Le AaBbCe An RAC 292 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Gray background image is obviously dark AaQBbCc AQBbCc AQBbCc AaQBbCc AaBbCc 1 Do not use paper that has already been run through the product 2 Try using a different type of paper 3 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself 4 Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 5 Open the Administration menu at the product control panel Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu Increase the Toner density setting 6
131. be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software you may no longer use such HP Software This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms the other terms will prevail 336 Appendix A Service and support ENWW ENWW 10 11 TRANSFER a Third Party Transfer The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one time transfer of the HP Software to another end user Any transfer will include all component parts media User Documentation this EULA and if applicable the Certificate of Authenticity The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA Upon transfer of the HP Software your license is automatically terminated b Restrictions You may not rent lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use You may not sublicense assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA PROPRIETARY RIGHTS All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law including applicable copyright trade secret patent and trademark laws You will not remove any product identification copyright
132. box labeled Always print to this printer even if its IP address changes Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3 If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP IP port use the hostname instead of the IP address 4 If the IP address is correct delete the product and then add it again The computer is unable to communicate with the product 1 Test network communication by pinging the product a Open a command line prompt on your computer For Windows click Start click Run and then type cmd b Type ping followed by the IP address for your product c If the window displays round trip times the network is working 2 If the ping command failed verify that the network hubs are on and then verify that the network settings the product and the computer are all configured for the same network The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network Hewlett Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode the default setting If you change these settings you must also change them for your network New software programs might be causing compatibility problems Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly 1 Check the network drivers print drivers and the network redirection 2 Verify that the operating system is configured correctly The product is disabled or other network se
133. c code of 0 indicates a normal modem response Some messages always display a numeric code of 0 other messages can have a range of numeric codes and a few messages have no numeric code Usually a numeric code of 0 indicates an error was not associated with the fax modem but occurred in another part of the fax system or other product sytem such as the printing system Non zero error codes give further detail into the particular action or process that the modem is executing and they do not necessarily indicate that there is a problem with the modem Persistent error messages with numeric codes different than those listed here require assistance of customer support Print a Fax T 30 Trace report before contacting customer support to help identify the problem This report contains details of the last fax call 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Fax e Fax T 30 Trace 3 Select the Print T 30 Report option to print the report 322 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Send fax messages Table 2 34 Send fax messages Message Error No Description Action Cancelled 0 Someone cancelled the fax at the None product control panel Success n a The fax was sent successfully None Fail Busy 0 The receiving fax machine is The fax will be retired busy automatically if configured otherwise try resending fax later No Answe
134. ce down or Face up Test Duplex Path Enable or disable two sided printing Number of Copies Set the numbers of copies to be printed the choices are 1 10 50 100 or 500 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button hd Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Paper Path Test 3 Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run Paper path sensors test This test displays the status of each paper path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Paper Path Sensors NOTE Exiting the Paper path sensor test menu and then reentering it will clear the test values from the previous test Table 2 9 Paper path sensors Sensor name Sensor Replacement part Description Paper path sensor number number test name Top sensor PS215 RM1 8617 O00CN Top sensor PCA PS215 Top ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 71 Table 2 9 Paper path sensors continued Sensor name Sensor Replacement part Description Paper path sensor number number test name Paper width sensor PS225 RM1 8618 000CN Paper width sensor PCA PS225 Paper Width 1 Fuser delivery sensor PS2 RM1 8505 000CN Fuser universal PS2 Fuser Output Duplex media f
135. cedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please see the numbers in this manual for repair and or warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The customer can do the following repairs Replace any original equipment that came with the device This includes the toner cartridge the supports for trays and bins the power cord and the telephone cord It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges Telephone Consumer Protection Act US The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business or o
136. cesencaeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaaaeees 61 vi ENWW ENWW Troubleshooting flowchart vic sirs senate ctums ena nnias aaiutoancasmarieue natem aceon 61 Power s bsystemi iis avene is a a EE outa A AE od eae a RE 62 Powerom checks sousse onteaiig aac rerantaman i a AE T 62 Power on troubleshooting overview ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeettaeeeeeens 62 Controkpan l checks oirinn a A R A E dre aoe men iced 63 Scanning SUSI STENT curv oiskinantdiatramuninporsphowkuiiuduetiqndsiveersWiiweainns dseghreoikinsbolvebeunbes 65 Tools for troubleshooting saceceitokcasatcinds acteascpasahtanet ton aandieyadtanse tvesin ta vide ceeena alan chanaaieegmadtaute reaeeles 66 Individual component dicighostes 3 c va ntact avacwi nae aed on ee 66 LED GIAGHOSTICS Litrorsynats csinacouatgneneeternancoeioelaatonrmeunreoscigisioorignnmeenyy E AEA 66 Understand lights on the formatter ccccceseceeeseeeeeeeeesteeeeeseees 66 Engine CIOGMOSIICS roi e oe lace iit acy bike heard ese tence tae O A 69 Eng inetest Butom jvsieroussrersonetoisknnewertaiiebuathdiababevosbaiubdatnnrycesied 69 Paper path fest cone tii a E E 71 Paper path sensors teshani reeni aa e a eee aeRO eRe 71 Marial sensor test actv5 8bathacc Got caurebachureoastboasd i aat n niea 73 SW501 Cartridge door switch test s sseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 75 PS8001 Rear door sensor test dnivainremowiidietan ate 76 PS215 Top Top of Page sensor test ccccccsesseeceeeeeett
137. control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies Formatter to control panel communication interruptions e The firmware does not fully initialize and configure the control panel interface e The control panel is not functioning either a failed assembly or power problem e Interface cabling between the formatter and control panel is damaged or disconnected 66 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW x TIP If the heartbeat LED is illuminated by an error condition or normal operation the formatter is fully seated and the power is on The pins for the LED circuit in the formatter connector are recessed so that this LED will not illuminate unless the formatter is fully seated The heartbeat LED operates according to the product state When the product is initializing see Heartbeat LED product initialization on page 67 Heartbeat LED product initialization The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the product is executing the firmware boot process Ey NOTE When the initialization process completes the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green the LED is off if the product is in Sleep Mode Table 2 8 Heartbeat LED product initialization Product initializing Heartbeat LED normal state Heartbeat LED error state state No power power cable Off Not applicable disconnected or power switch off Power on immediately Red solid Red solid afte
138. cription The product indicates when a supply level is very low E NOTE After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the fuser kit ey NOTE After replacing the fuser kit reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub menu Fuser Kit very low To continue touch OK Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low NOTE After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the fuser kit 2 NOTE After replacing the fuser kit reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub menu Incompatible lt supply gt Description The indicated lt supply gt is not compatible with this product gt 10 00 35 event code Black toner cartridge o 10 23 35 event code Fuser kit Recommended action Replace the incompatible supply ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 231 Incompatible supplies Description Toner cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product The product cannot print with these supplies installed Event codes are supply specific Recommended action Touch the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies Replace the supplies with those that are designed for this prod
139. crypted disk Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available ENWW Preboot menu options 55 Table 2 3 Preboot menu options 3 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device continued continued Description Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device Secure Erase Erase Unlock Get Status External Device Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled ATA secure erase command one pass over write Erases the entire disk including firmware The disk remains an encrypted disk Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled Erases the HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk The disk becomes a non encrypted disk This item provides disk status information if any is available Select the External Device item to erase the internal device or get status about the internal device Secure Erase Erase Unlock Get Status Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system wi
140. ct uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I O The product can receive data from more than one I O simultaneously until the O buffer is full This can occur even when the product is offline e Contextsensitive switching The product can automatically recognize the personality PS or PCL of each job and configure itself to serve that personality e Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next For example if a print job is sent to the product in landscape mode the subsequent print jobs print in landscape mode only if they are formatted for landscape printing PML The printer management language PML allows remote configuration and status read back through the I O ports 6 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Control panel The formatter sends and receives product status and command data to and from the control panel PCA ENWW Formatter control system 7 8 Engine control system The engine control system coordinates all product functions according to commands that the formatter sends The engine control system drives the system the image formation system and the pickup feed delivery system The engine control system contains the following major components DC controller Low voltage power supply High voltage power supply Figure 1 2 Engine control system Chapter 1 Formatter Engine control system DC controller Low voltage power supply
141. d in the ADF paper path page again 2 Verify the paper meets the product specifications 3 Check the paper guides and make sure they are set to the correct paper width 4 Verify the paper path is clear 5 Check for motor stall 31 03 31 and 31 03 32 errors 6 Replace the ADF 258 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Event log message Description Action 31 13 13 The ADF jam access door is open 1 Verify the jam access cover is closed 2 Try feeding the paper again 3 Verify the flag is not broken off 4 With a piece of paper check that the photo sensor is working 5 Replace the ADF 31 13 14 This is a feed jam in the ADF and the motor 1 Verify the paper meets the product is not turning specifications 2 Make sure the ADF input tray is not overloaded 3 Check the event log for ADF errors and resolve any errors first 4 Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error If there is no error then the motor is good 5 Verify the motor cables are connected 6 Reseat the ADF to scanner control board or formatter cables 7 Replace the ADF 31 13 15 This is a duplex refeed jam in ADF The paper 1 Remove the jammed paper jam occurs on the back side copy The duplex refeed does not make it to the deskew sensor 2 Verify there is nothing in the paper path of the duplex refeed area 3 Retry the copy job 4 Replace the ADF 99 00 01 Remote firmware upgrade
142. d the DC controller PCA J106 Replace the laser scanner assembly 52 00 20 Error To continue turn off then on ENWW Description A scanner rotation error has occurred Recommended action 1 2 Turn the product off and then on Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu Tools for troubleshooting 213 3 If the component tests showed a startup failure reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor J56 and J58 and the DC controller PCA J106 4 Replace the laser scanner assembly 52 lt XX gt 00 Error To continue turn off then on Description The laser scanner experienced a startup error o XX 04 or 05 Laser scanner motor startup error o XX 05 Laser scanner rotation error Recommended action XX 04 1 Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu 2 Check the connector J501 on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connector J106 on the DC controller PCA 3 If the error persists replace the appropriate laser scanner XX 05 1 Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu 2 Check the connector J50 Y K or J503 C M on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connectors J106 J110 C K or J111 C M on the DC controller PCA 3 If the error persists replace the appropriate laser scanner 54 XX YY Error Description A sensor error has occurred Recommended action 54 00 03 Environmental sensor failure 1 Turn the product off
143. delivery Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick up rates Or you can drop off your packaged toner cartridge s at any U S Post Office or any FedEx shipping center or store For the location of your nearest U S Post Office please call 1 800 ASK USPS or visit www usps com For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center store please call 1 800 GOFEDEX or visit www fedex com For more information or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns visit www hp com recycle or call 1 800 340 2445 Information subject to change without notice Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS label Call 1 800 340 2445 for information and instructions The U S Postal Service provides no cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for Alaska and Hawaii Non U S returns Paper To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide found inside the packaging of your new product supply item or visit www hp com recycle Select your country region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281 2002 Material restrictions ENWW This HP product does not contain added
144. der from the calculation in step 2 is the date ENWW Service mode functions 309 Using the Service ID 12287 as an example the date conversion is as follows 1 12 1990 2002 so the year is 2002 2 287 divided by 30 9 with a remainder of 17 Because there is a remainder add 1 to 9 to get 10 which represents October 3 The remainder in step 2 is 17 so that is the date 4 The complete date is 17 October 2002 Ey NOTE A six day grace period is built into the date system Product cold reset Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1 Turn the product on Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens Use the down arrow button to highlight 3 Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow w button to highlight 8 Startup Options item and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow w button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item and then touch the OK button oe amp 2 oe Touch the Home button to highlight 1 Continue and then touch the OK button Ey NOTE The product will initialize Format Disk and Partial Clean functions Active and repository firmware locations The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts The main components are the Windows CE Operating System and the product peripheral firmware files There are two locations partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored e The Active where the Operating System and firm
145. duct always remains accessible to this product Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an unlocked mode for single service event The secure disk that is already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product and uses the old disk s encryption password with the new disk The secure disk that is already locked to this product remains accessible to this product Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet to be installed secure disk CAUTION Data on the missing secure disk will be permanently inaccessible Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non secure disk for this session only and then search for the missing secure disk in future sessions Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk and unlock it if required This might take a long time NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled ATA secure erase command one pass over write Erases entire disk including firmware The disk remains an encrypted disk Erase Unlock Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled Erases the crypto key The disk becomes a non en
146. e 2006 95 EC and carries the CE Marking C accordingly 354 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two Conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems 2 For regulatory purposes this product is assigned a Regulatory model number This number should not be confused with the marketing names or the product number s 3 The product meets the requirements of EN55022 amp CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 4 Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries regions have been applied to this product in addition to those listed above 5 This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model numbers are BOISB 0703 00 as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries regions this product will be sold Boise Idaho USA July 27 2011 For Regulatory Topics only contact European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Hewlett P
147. e ROM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 243 Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system Size mismatch in Tray lt X gt Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray Recommended action 1 2 7 8 Load the correct paper Verify that the paper is positioned correctly Close the tray and verify that the control panel lists the correct paper size and type Reconfigure the size and type if necessary If necessary use the control panel menus to reconfigure the size and type settings for the specified tray Make sure that connectors J513 J507 and J501 are fully seated on the high voltage power supply Make sure that connector J601 is fully seated on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the high voltage power supply If the error persists replace the DC controller PCA Standard bin full Remove all paper from bin Description The specified output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue Recommended action Empty the specified output bin Staple Cartridge low Description The product indicates when a supply level is low Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge Staple Cartridge very low To continue touch OK Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low 244 Chapter 2 So
148. e button When the upgrade is complete the product will initialize 6 NOTE The upgrade process can take up to 10 minutes to complete 8 When the upgrade process is complete print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed 328 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW A Service and support e Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement e HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement e HP policy on non HP supplies e HP anticounterfeit Web site e Data stored on the toner cartridge e End User License Agreement e OpenSSL e Customer self repair warranty service e Customer support ENWW 329 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525dn M525f One year on site warranty HP warrants to you the end user customer that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase for the period specified above If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase for the period specified above due to defects
149. e drum motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu Use the disable toner cartridge check and run the drum motor component test with the toner cartridge removed If the test passes replace the toner cartridge If the test fails replace the drum motor If the product was previously serviced check the connector at the drum motor assembly and the DC controller See the circuit diagram for details 59 05 60 Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a drum motor rotation error Recommended action 1 2 Perform the drum motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu Use the disable toner cartridge check and run the drum motor component test with the toner cartridge removed If the test passes replace the toner cartridge If the test fails replace the drum motor If the product was previously serviced check the connector at the drum motor assembly and the DC controller See the circuit diagram for details 60 00 0Y Tray lt Y gt lifting error ENWW Description The indicated tray has not lifted into the paper feed position Recommended action 60 00 11 Lifter motor failure M7 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the connector 1141 on the DC controller PCA 3 Check the connector J78 on the lifter motor M7 Tools for troubleshooting 219 4 Use the tray lifter sensor SR9 test in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly func
150. e photosensitive drum which is located in the toner cartridge must rotate in order for the print process to work The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating 1 Open the cartridge door 2 Remove the toner cartridge 3 Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt tipped marker Note the position of the mark 4 Install the toner cartridge and then close the cartridge door The start up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark on the gear 5 Open the product and inspect the mark on the cartridge drive gear Verify that the mark moved If there was no movement inspect the main gear assembly to make sure that it connects with the toner cartridge gears If the drive gears function but the drum does not move replace the toner cartridge Component test special mode test This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems 96 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly If you turn on the Repeat option from the drop down menu the test cycles the component on and off This process continues for two minutes and then the test terminates 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests e Component Test 3 Select the component test options for the test yo
151. e wake or sleep event Event Time Event Days Select days of the week from a list Sleep Mode Auto Off After Sleep Timer Settings Range 1 to 120 minutes Default 60 minutes Set the number of minutes after which the product enters Sleep or Auto Off mode Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to increase or decrease the number of minutes Wake Auto On to These Events All Events Network port Power button only 116 Chapter 2 Solve problems Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray lt X gt Print Test Page Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back Use the Adjust Tray lt X gt menu to adjust the registration settings for each tray Before adjusting these values print a registration test page It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary You can adjust values for X1 Shift X2 Shift Y1 Shift and Y2 Shift Use the Print Test Page option to print a page to test the image registration It provides alignment guides in the X and Y directions so you can determine which adjustments are necessary ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 117 Table 2
152. earhis de taomtoena hte Namen tind eda Mocemacseesatnae 95 Haltselesit nani oe dea oni cantar tere a he ete 96 Drum rotation test check jp csiacnescrsascnscoeesiner nna nuvceatvomammbannrworn 96 Component test special mode test sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 96 Diagrams puen eE E E tate efecto E ea E E 98 vii viii Block didara mss zori a E A ET A E aan 98 Location of canneclorsaac icons Paonia Dane nN 100 DC controller connections cccccseeseeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesnteeeeeeenees 100 Formatter connections 2 0 00 eeeeeececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecceeeeeaaaeenneeeees 101 Plug jack locations nsien a E AEE 102 Locations of major components cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseteeeteseess 102 General timing charts oicc ccactte cetaes tad brace aweiagbtaveladdeds tached sei neansseeancvededads 106 Circuit CEG hams rren a ai BU OO 107 Internal print quality test pages ccccccecesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceenneeeeeeeeseseeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeseaaees 109 Clean the paper path sas ctiteasirars caret aaa tigutehen ateeee nea maha 109 Set up an auto cleaning page lt is ciaeanec nein eetaciottants 109 Print a configuration page oii dint sa wnienoinstorsinasookastanrycabsorsGoletunnmoreebories 110 Configuration page nate maasiac te atiacowinascdtetachadd ua copetemenayatetaaes 110 HP embedded Jetdirect page cceeeseceseetteeeeseeteeeeeneeeeeeaes 111 Finding important information on the configurati
153. ecifications For more information see the product user guide Verify that the product is configured for the correct paper type Use the Fuser Test Page option in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser If the error persists replace the fuser Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide The laser scanner wire connectors might have poor contact Reconnect the connectors J12 and J3100 The laser scanner might be damaged Replace the laser scanner Page skew Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself Verify that no torn pieces of paper are inside the product Make sure that paper is loaded correctly and that all adjustments have been made Make sure that the guides in the tray are not too tight or too loose against the paper Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 294 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Curl or wave
154. ecreasing it could make photographs appear smoother Automatic Tone Default ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 139 Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Job Build Cropping Options Job Build off Job Build on Do not crop Use to combine several original documents into one job Also use to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time The product temporarily saves all the scanned images After you have scanned all the pages for the job touch Finish to finish the job Use this menu item to Crop to content automatically crop the scan for digital sending Use the Crop to content option to scan the smallest possible area that has detectable content Erase Edges Use Inches Back side erase Front side erase Use this menu item to remove blemishes such as dark borders or staple marks by cleaning the specified edges of the scanned image In each of the text boxes enter the measurements in millimeters or inches for how much of the top edge bottom edge left edge and right edge to clean Blank Page Suppression 140 Chapter 2 Solve problems Disabled Enabled Use to prevent blank pages in the original document from being included in the output document ENWW Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu conti
155. ector 155D on the paper tray paper out sensor and the connector J106 on the paper feeder controller PCA Load Tray lt X gt Size To continue touch OK ENWW Description This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded and other paper trays are available for use It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires Recommended action 1 2 3 Load the correct paper in the tray If prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded Otherwise touch the OK button to select another tray Tools for troubleshooting 235 Load Tray lt X gt Size To use another tray touch Options Description This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded and other paper trays are available for use It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires Recommended action 1 Load the correct paper in the tray 2 f prompted confirm the size and type of paper loaded 3 Otherwise touch the OK button to select another tray Load Tray lt X gt Type Size Description This message appears even though there is paper loaded in the tray Recommended action 1 Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides 2 Ifthe error persists use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is correctly
156. ed the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge Edge to Edge Normal recommended Use to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of Edge to Edge output copies when the original document is printed close to the edges Display Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Display Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting 158 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 22 Display Settings menu First level Second level Key Press Sound Values On Off Description Use to specify whether you hear a sound when you touch the screen or press buttons on the control panel Language Settings Language Select from a list of languages that the product supports Use to select a different language for control panel messages and specify the default keyboard layout When you select a new language the keyboard layout automatically changes to match the factory default for the selected language Keyboard Layout Each language has a default keyboard layout To change it select from a list of layouts Select the default keyboard layout that matches the language you w
157. ed Jetdirect configuration page 111 link speed settings 178 non HP supplies 333 notes iii O online support 341 operations document feeder 46 engine control system 8 laser scanner 26 scanner 46 toner cartridge memory 34 output bin jams 264 P pages blank 303 not printing 303 printing slowly 303 pages count 306 from product copy 307 from product copy scan count 307 from product document feeder 307 from product flatbed 307 from product refurbish date 306 from product send scan 307 reset 306 See also counts paper curled 295 default size reset 308 skewed 294 stop in path for testing 94 wrinkled 295 paper path diagnostic test 71 stop movement for testing 94 paper pickup problems solving 286 paper path test sensors 71 password Service menu PIN 306 PBX systems troubleshooting 320 phone lines troubleshooting 320 physical specifications 344 port configuration information 111 power consumption 344 power supply troubleshooting 62 primary charging stage 30 Print Options menu control panel 157 print quality black page 295 blurred 297 dropouts 292 gray background 293 horizontal lines 292 image defects 290 light print 290 lines 292 loose toner 293 manual print modes 288 misformed characters 294 repeating defects 294 repetitive images 297 scattered lines 296 smeared toner 293 specks 291 test pages 109 tire tracks 296 white horizontal lines 295 white lines vertical 295 white spots 296 Print Quality menu
158. ed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use Please follow the applicable instructions below Multiple returns more than one cartridge 1 Package each HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original box and bag 2 Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape The package can weigh up to 31 kg 70 Ib 3 Use a single pre paid shipping label OR 1 Use your own suitable box or request a free bulk collection box from www hp com recycle or 1 800 340 2445 holds up to 31 kg 70 lb of HP LaserJet toner cartridges 2 Use a single pre paid shipping label Single returns 1 Package the HP LaserJet toner cartridge in its original bag and box 2 Place the shipping label on the front of the box Shipping For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet toner cartridge recycling returns use the pre paid pre addressed shipping label contained in the box To use the UPS label give the package to the UPS driver during 348 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW your next delivery or pick up or take it to an authorized UPS drop off center Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick up rates For the location of your local UPS drop off center call 1 800 PICKUPS or visit www ups com If you are returning the package with the FedEx label give the package to either the U S Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick up or
159. eed sensor PS502 RM1 8519 000CN HVPS PS502 Duplexer Refeed Rear cover open sensor PS1 WG8 8519 000CN Photointerrupter PS1 Rear Door Face down media tray PS4 Photo interruptor Photointerrupter PS4 Output Bin Full media full sensor WG8 85 19 000CN Top cover assembly Top cover assembly RM1 8516 000CN Paper feeder media feed PS8008 CE530 69001 Tray 3 feeder unit PS8008 Tray 3 feed sensor Tray 3 sensor Paper feeder media feed PS8008 CE530 69001 Tray 4 feeder unit PS8008 Tray 4 feed sensor Tray 4 sensor 1 Tray 3 and Tray 4 use a PS8008 sensor 72 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Manual sensor test Performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tests Manual Sensor Test Table 2 10 Manual sensor tests Sensor or switch name Sensor number Replacement part number Description Paper path sensor test name Testing of sensor Cartridge door switch Face up detect sensor Paper feeder media feed sensor Tray 3 SW501 PS8001 PS8008 RM1 8499 000CN WG8 5935 000CN CE530 69001 Interlock switch Photointerrupter Tray 3 feeder unit SW501 Cartridge Door PS8001 Rear Door PS8008 Tray 3 Feed sensor Open the cartridge door Open the rear door to about 90 degrees Remove the
160. eeeeeeeeaes 77 PS225 Paper width 1 sensor test ssseseceeeeeceeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeaees 78 PS2 Fuser output sensor test eseeeeeeeececeeeeaceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 PS502 Duplexer refeed sensor test cc ccceceeeseseeceeeetteeeeeeensaes 80 PS1 Rear bin sensor test suakseco issues esate ideatvaseereeeer etal aaiuatones 81 PS4 Output birttullsehsortestnwrc nena aemniurensuns 82 PS8008 Tray 3 Feed SEnSOF scisinistovccisneistiravnnevombedasiyseousonay bacnned 83 PS8008 Tray 4 Feed sensor ccccccceeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 84 Tray bin manual sensor test s ceciecsrc kine ene RAR em 85 PS205 Tray 1 Paper sensor test eseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 PS3 Tray 2 Paper sensor test cccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteecereeeeeeeess 88 SW235 Tray 2 Cassette sensor test eeeeeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 PS4 Output bin full sensor test 0 ccccccceceseeceeesseeeeeeteeeeseneeeeseaes 90 PS451 Tray 3 paper sensor test ceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeeeess 91 PS461 Tray 3 cassette sensor test ceeecceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeess 92 PS451 Tray 4 paper sensor test cceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeeess 93 PS461 Tray 4 cassette sensor test ceeeeceeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 Pritit SIO testean ea a OI RG nao 94 Component tesisine og a nanan ndaet EE Segoe Sense Soect aE E E E 95 Control panel tests acapiaciinsae
161. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaees 310 Partial Clen tac stecseececrn rd tegen itv aa E OAE EE EO ante 311 Execute a 3 Partial Clean icv escvedsranvendiavanineiees snemnqrabieesnvornersves 311 Format LET Sarthe towne a a E e ben sp 312 Execute a 2 Formot Disk anisncsosavionnanedvossnansanmishnniniebiumsosnbexeeiind 312 Solve fax problems gene ar een nea rr EC E E a E E 313 Checklist for solving fax problems wsiciajessacciipdnidanietaiaelaseasduaidiinnte eanidaamaentianeaniadan 313 What type of phone line are you using ccccccceesseceeeteeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeenneees 313 Are you using a surge protection device ccccccesscceeeesseeeeessteeeeeteeeees 313 Are you using a phone company voice messaging service or an answering Machine aaah na eae E E E E 314 Does your phone line have a call waiting feature ccccceeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 314 Check fax accessory status ciesbrenncatecicctsestsnlemedonniesseneennaieeuiaehaneenamen 315 General fax problems 5 pe ascriniuidbdeeatdwrmpucvaccinnssenincwtntetaneauiseuabstenbtuntinlecssceealpleirenonaeebes 316 Use Fax over VolP networks caiinniagantaninernea tena adaenreeneneeeenumaieenis 317 Problems with receiving faxes cx cskadcvaacevsceustsaveeannvandauavectavneacanareninanivennsvneentataondees 318 Problems with sending faxes so nss dainnaptesisponetswanaiteaa yp mreauclonatineieeasuetne danse nteanndvetscelisunntean 320 eb alice akelele Stn eet ne Rec E Ree Ne men Ne ae eet 322 Fax error messages on the p
162. eeeeeeeeees 219 59 05 60 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 60 00 0Y Tray lt Y gt lifting error sncundsseventeiaashunteieneereteacneianends 219 62 00 00 No system To continue turn off then on ceeeeeeeees 220 69 11 YY Error To continue touch OK aesssssssssssesssrressressse 220 70 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220 81 WX 00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on 220 81 WX YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on 221 81 YY YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on ccceeeeeee 221 98 00 0X Corrupt data in X volume cccccsssssseceessseeneeeeeenes 221 lt Binname gt full Remove all paper from bin cccceeeeeeteeeeees 222 A second USB wireless networking accessory has been detected 222 Bad optional tray connection estactctind estore mara 222 Black Cartridge low iui shsiwatsieauncnadieiuneons dectsdasertoutelives batniaweond es 223 Black Cartridge very oW sidssvotentdetcsatachetrcen cimsaisenaees dss 223 Black Cartridge very low To continue touch OK ssseccccccccse 223 Card slot device failure To clear touch Clear c cccceeeceeeeees 223 Card slot file operation failed To clear touch Clear 0065 224 Card slot file system is full To clear touch Clear ccccccseeeees 224 Card slot is write protected To clear touch Clear
163. eentaaees 182 Calibration Cleaning menu s ciccsessrsaseiedervizisnseeessshes covadeivasbeceres 183 USB Firmware Upgrade menu cysiseeieiearnaineennvanernan 185 Service MENU onsinnig i ar aeania ana Mobi ont S ET 185 Interpret control panel messages cccsescceceeseeeeenseeseeeceseeseceeeeeeeeseseeeenseeeeeneeees 186 Control panel message types 4 035440 enieaomtien ein eematmeient 186 Control panel messages cccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 186 11 00 YY Internal clock error To continue touch OK vo 186 TSAI DI r TIAL DA 2 cov cer nace A a E E 186 ENWW ENWW TIAI OA sce cv ace pane he toa EE A A a Gone uit eae 187 TIAS FFor TIAA EP a hcte chip Ui Ye dune OR 187 BBZ DT era ae OE E r ENN 188 R BADZ rr ein E E E ea 189 EREA EIEEE A AA E SST 189 T3 B2 XX rosina n n a o NA LE EIES 190 TBZ XX deo tee aati ead ae A REA 191 eA BG a E E E S 192 TI BOXX rrerapen annaran a aa ani 192 TI BOXA tuinne a A nea E NRE 193 TSIBO XK n A etre etme nner a E e ee 194 13 BA EE or 13 DA EE secon teesmnnnaieguieeiseanrnaioauitemeangnaneaietors 195 13 03 FF or 13 B2 FE menna a ET 195 TDS D EE A RS Ge 196 PRE eX caina n a a aE a ATOS N AE NEENA 197 20 00 00 Insufficient memory lt Device gt To continue touch OK 198 21 00 00 Page too complex To continue touch OK ou eee 198 30 01 23 Scanner calibration failure cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 198 30 01 36 Upgrade Error Try
164. elected the job will stop and require the user to press the OK button before continuing 160 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Manage Supplies menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Manage Supplies menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 23 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Values Description Supplies Status Print View Supply Settings Black Cartridge Low Threshold 1 100 Set the estimated Settings percentage at which Default 10 the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low Very Low Settings Stop Prompt to continue Continue Specifies how the product notifies you when the toner cartridge is very low Stop The product stops until you replace the toner cartridge Prompt to continue The product stops and prompts you to replace the toner cartridge You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing Continue The product alerts you that a toner cartridge is very low but it continues printing Document Feeder Kit Low Threshold Settings 1 100 Default 10 Set the percentage at which the product notifies you when the document feeder kit is very low Tools for troubleshooting 161 Table 2 23 Manage Supplies menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
165. em message display on page 62 Power on ee Yes No gt After the control panel display is functional see step 2 2 Does the message Ready display on the After the errors have been corrected go to step 3 control panel Control panel messages Yes 4 No gt 3 Open the Troubleshooting menu and print an_ If the event log does not print check for error messages event log to see the history of errors with this Event log product If paper jams inside the product see the jams section of the product service manual Does the event log print Yes 4 If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print No gt an event log see the control panel message section of the service manual After successfully printing and evaluating the event log see step 4 ENWW Troubleshooting process 61 Table 2 7 Troubleshooting flowchart continued Power subsystem Power on checks 4 Open the Reports menu and print the If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration configuration pages to verify that all the page remove the accessory and reinstall it Information accessories are installed pages After evaluating the configuration pages see step 5 Are all the accessories installed Yes No gt 5 Does the print quality meet the customer s Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect requirements tables See the images defects table in
166. emoved or replace check the connector on the intermediate connect board 3 Measure the voltage between the connectors J262 1 and J262 3 on the high voltage power supply lower immediately after the product power is turned on If the voltage changes from O VDC to approximately 24 VDC replace the fan FM3 57 00 04 Fan motor 4 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on 57 00 05 Fan motor 5 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on 57 00 06 Fan motor 6 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on 57 00 07 Fan motor 7 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on 57 00 08 Fan motor 8 malfunction 1 Turn the product off and then on Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 58 00 04 Error To continue turn off then on Description The low voltage power supply is defective Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the connector 1143 on the DC controller PCA 3 If the error persists replace the low voltage power supply 59 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on Description A paper path malfunction error has occurred Recommended action Turn the product off then on 59 00 20 Error To continue turn off then on Description A motor rotation error has occurred Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 59 00 30 Error To continue turn off then on Description A fuser motor startup error has occurred Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on Per
167. end Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Document File Type Select from a listof PDF provides the best file types overall image and text quality JPEG is a good choice for most graphics Most computers have a browser that can view JPEG files This file type produces one file per page TIFF is a standard file format that many graphics programs support This file type produces one file per page MTIFF stands for multi page TIFF This file type saves multiple scanned pages in a single file XPS XML Paper Specification creates an XAML file that preserves the original formatting of the document and supports color graphics and embedded fonts NOTE OCR file types are not supported on this product unless attached to DSS ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 133 Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text Manually adjust Use to optimize the Picture output for a Text particular type of content You can optimize the output for text printed pictures or a mixture Printed picture Photograph Manually adjust Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures Text Use to optimize the text portion of the copy where text and or pictures are on the original Printed picture Use for line drawings and preprinted images
168. ent product has replaced the original If you continue data is permanently lost ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 201 Recommended action o To save the data on the board or disk turn the product off Replace the board or disk with another board or disk o To delete the data on the board or disk and continue touch the OK button 40 00 01 USB I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description The USB buffer overflowed during a busy state Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to print the transferred data Some data might be lost 2 Check the host configuration 40 00 02 Embedded I O buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server An incorrect communications protocol might be in use Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to print the transferred data Some data might be lost 2 Check the host configuration 40 00 03 EIO lt X gt buffer overflow To continue touch OK Description The product displays this message when the EIO card in the indicated slot has overflowed its O buffer during a busy state Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue 40 00 04 EIO lt X gt bad transmission To continue touch OK 202 Description The product displays this message when a connection with the card in the indicated slot has been abnormally broken Recommended action Touch the OK button to contin
169. eplaced 5 If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged replace the roller 6 The transfer roller shaft might be dirty poor contact Remove the transfer roller and clean the shaft 7 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply Scattered lines 1 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide 2 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 3 Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 4 Change the toner density Open the Administration menu at the product control panel Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu Change the Toner density setting 5 Open the Administration menu at the product control panel Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu Open the Optimize menu and set the Line Detail setting to Up 296 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Blurred print 1 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide A 2 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 3 Turn over the paper in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 4 Do not use paper that already has been run through the
170. eplaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable E NOTE After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 241 Recommended action Replace the fuser kit A WARNING The fuser can be hot while the product is in use Replace staple cartridge Description The staple cartridge is empty Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge located in the stapler stacker Replace supplies Description This alert appears only if the product is configured to stop when a supplies reach the very low threshold Two or more supplies have reached the estimated end of life The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life The actual life remaining might be different than estimated The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable ey NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends Recorded event codes depend on which supplies are at the end of life o 10 00 70 event code Black toner cartridge o gt 10 23 70 event code Fuser kit o 10 22 70 event code Transfer kit Recommended action gt Touch the OK button to find out which supplies need to be re
171. er Fuser film Pressure roller Fuser bias Cleaning stage Step 7 The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off of the photosensitive drum and deposits it into the waste toner case Figure 1 24 Drum cleaning Cleaning blade ENWW Image formation system 33 Toner detection The product uses a nonvolatile memory tag built into the toner cartridge Print cartridge detection happens when the engine controller detects the presence of a genuine HP print cartridge that contains a memory tag Toner detection happens as the engine controller reads or writes the data that is stored on the memory tag The engine controller renews the information in the prescribed timing and reads or writes it from or to the memory tag The engine controller commands the memory tag to read or write with the following conditions e Read o Power is on gt The cartridge door is closed gt A command is received from the formatter e Write A page of paper is printed e A command is received from the formatter When the engine controller fails to read or write three times in a row it determines that the memory tag is abnormal and sends a cartridge memory abnormality warning to the formatter Figure 1 25 Toner cartridge memory tag Memory controller PCA Print cartridge Memory tag contact 34 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system The pickup feed delivery system co
172. er print speed to ensure the best print quality Large batches narrow paper and special paper such as gloss transparency cardstock and HP Tough Paper can slow the print job The product might not be pulling paper correctly The paper is jamming in the product Print in smaller batches on a different type of paper or on a different size of paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly Clear the jam The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected Other devices are running on your computer e _ Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it e Try printing a job that has printed in the past e Try using a different USB cable The product might not share a USB port If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product the other device might be interfering To connect and use the product you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer ENWW Solve performance problems 303 Solve connectivity problems Solve USB connection problems If you have connected the product directly to a computer check the cable e Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product e Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m 6 65 ft Try using a shorter cable e Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product Replace the cable if necessary
173. er Umit sodrga nnna a e brow E E 232 Install SUES nane EE AAT N 233 Internal disk device failure To clear touch Clear cee 233 Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch Clear 05 233 Internal disk file system is full To clear touch Clear ceeeeeeees 233 xi xii Internal disk is write protected To clear touch Clear 0006 233 Internal disk not found ssssnnnssnnsosennesssseoessseenrsssrotssssrorseeressse 234 Internal disk not functional s0socersuas rusdeontivstoushelieveadircuweniatouss 234 Internal disk not initialized To clear touch Clear ceee 234 Internal disk spinning up 4 cc ewranincii i endiennen eos 234 Load Tray 1 Type Size nisesers cnisitenredsaueniotusgtourvontiversunisiaoneele 234 Load Tray 1 Type Size To continue touch OK eee 234 load Tray lt gt Size ser aket eas n eet auat acetate means 235 Load Tray lt X gt Size To continue touch OK eee 235 Load Tray lt X gt Size To use another tray touch Options 236 load Tray lt X gt Type Size iacs enticed 236 Load Tray lt X gt Type Size To use another tray touch PODHONS soses Zenctics Sabtadec hase tiwastiasetese E T 236 Manually feed output stack Then touch OK to print second sides 237 Manually feed Size 4 cds vasvusas otsenancet da vomtende wionyonuatadedeledaneneck 237 Manually feed Size To continue t
174. er roller 50 mm Toner cartridge developer roller 76 mm Fuser fuser film 79 mm Fuser pressure roller 95 mm Toner cartridge OPC ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 113 Control panel menus Administration menu You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup To open the HP Embedded Web Server enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser Reports menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Reports menu Table 2 15 Reports menu First level Second level Values Description Configuration Status Pages Administration Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire Administration menu and the View selected values for each setting Current Settings Page Print Print a summary of the current settings for the product This View might be helpful if you plan to make changes and need a record of the present configuration Configuration Page Print Shows the product settings and installed accessories View Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies View reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed serial number page counts and maintenance information HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience The actual remaining supply levels might be di
175. eshooting 207 Y calibration type Z event o o 47 FC 00 event code 47 FC 01 event code 47 FC 02 event code 47 FC 03 event code 47 FC 10 event code 47 FC 11 event code 47 FC 12 event code 47 FC 13 event code 47 FC 20 event code 47 FC 21 event code 47 FC 22 event code 47 FC 23 event code 47 FC 30 event code 47 FC 31 event code 47 FC 32 event code 47 FC 33 event code 47 FC 40 event code 47 FC 41 event code 47 FC 42 event code 47 FC 43 event code Recommended action 1 2 Color plane registration CPR image not found at system initialization CPR store image failure CPR image not found CPR print engine execution failure Consecutive Dmax Dhalf image not found at system initialization Consecutive Dmax Dhalf store image failure Consecutive Dmax Dhalf image not found Consecutive Dmax Dhalf print engine execution failure Error diffusion image not found at system initialization Error diffusion store image failure Error diffusion image not found Error diffusion print engine execution failure Drum speed adjustment Image not found at system initialization Drum speed adjustment store image failure Drum speed adjustment image not found Drum speed adjustment print engine execution failure Pulse width modulation image not found at system initialization Pulse width modulation store image failure Pulse width modulation image not found Pulse width modulation p
176. fferent than the approximations provided Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the View product lists whether they were simplex duplex monochrome or color and reports the page count File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in View the product memory 114 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 15 Reports menu continued First level Second level Values Description Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services for the product View Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received View by this product Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing View faxes This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to View this product Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product View Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax operation either sent or View received Other Pages PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts General Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Genera Settings menu In the following table asterisks
177. form the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu gt Replace the fuser motor 59 00 40 Error To continue turn off then on ENWW Description A fuser motor rotational error has occurred Tools for troubleshooting Reconnect the connectors J8002 and J1504 on the DC controller PCA 217 Recommended action 1 e O ON Turn the product off and then on Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu Reconnect the connectors J8002 and J1504 on the DC controller PCA Replace the fuser motor 59 00 YY Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a printing error Recommended action 59 00 90 or 59 00 A0 ITB motor M1 start up error or ITB motor M1 abnormal rotational error Remove the ITB and check for damage Use the ITB motor M1 drive test in the component test to verify that the ITB motor is properly functioning If it is not replace the ITB motor assembly If the product was previously serviced check the connectors at the ITB motor assembly and the DC controller See the circuit diagram for details 59 00 CO Developer alienation motor M10 error 1 59 00 FO T1 Use the developer engagement and disengagement drive test in the component test to verify that the disengagement mechanisms are properly functioning If they are not replace the developer alienation motor Use the manual sensor test to verify that the developer diseng
178. gistration shutter 3 Use a small screwdriver to activate the Top sensor Figure 2 5 Test the Top sensor 4 Check the control panel display for sensor response 5 If there is no response replace the Top sensor RM1 861 7 OOOCN ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 77 PS225 Paper width 1 sensor test Test the paper width sensor PS225 1 Open the cartridge door and then remove the toner cartridge 2 Raise and then lower the registration flap to activate the sensor Figure 2 6 Test the paper width sensor 3 Check the control panel display for a sensor response 4 If there is no response replace the paper width sensor PCA RM1 8618 OO00CN 78 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS2 Fuser output sensor test Test the fuser output sensor PS2 1 Open the rear door 2 Slowly insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser output sensor Figure 2 7 Test the fuser output sensor 3 Check the control panel display for a sensor response 4 If there is no response replace the fuser RM1 8508 O00CN ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 79 PS502 Duplexer refeed sensor test Test the duplexer refeed sensor PS502 1 Remove the Tray 2 cassette 2 Press the green lever to release the duplex media feed assembly metal tray 3 Raise the duplex media feed assembly until it snaps into place Figure 2 8 Test the duplexer refeed sensor 4 Check the control panel display for sensor response 5 If there is no response
179. hardware recycling 350 end of life disposal 349 engine diagnostics 69 engine test 69 engine control system 8 envelopes wrinkled problem solving 295 environmental stewardship program 347 error codes 322 366 Index error messages event log listed numerically 255 numerical list 186 types of 186 event log 66 clear 254 306 information 112 messages listed numerically 255 print 254 view 254 event log messages 253 F fax feeding problems 316 Fax Settings menu control panel 141 FCC regulations 346 feeding problems 316 Finnish laser safety statement 359 firmware date codes 112 version information 111 firmware downloading new 326 flowcharts troubleshooting 61 formatter resets after replacing 306 formatter lights 66 fraud Web site 334 fuser jams 273 fusing stage 32 G General Settings menu control panel 115 gray background problem solving 293 H HP Customer Care 341 HP fraud Web site 334 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 111 lights 66 l image defects problem solving 290 image repetition problem solving 297 installation date calculation 307 verify for optional accessories 110 internal clock errors 186 IPv4 information 111 IPv information 111 J jams auto navigation 261 clearing 261 common causes of 261 diagnostic test for 71 document feeder 263 duplexer 276 fuser 273 locations 262 output bin 264 rear door 273 toner cartridge 271 Tray 1 265 Tray2
180. he connector J50 between the fuser and the product If it is damaged replace the fuser If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the fuser W B High fuser temperature 3 1 2 9 Remove and then reseat the fuser Remove any residual paper in the product Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the print driver Making sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the fuser 210 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW W 1 2 3 4 W 1 2 3 4 W 1 2 3 4 W 1 2 3 W 1 22 2 3 W 1 2 3 1 Low fuser error temperature error Remove and then reseat the fuser Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the fuser 2 Fuser warm up failure Reconnect the connector J50 between the fuser and the DC controller PCA Turn the product off Remove the fuser and then reinstall it Replace the fuser wire harness If the error persists replace the fuser 3 High fuser temperature 1 Remove and the
181. he factory default setting Table 2 21 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Values Description Number of Copies Range 1 32000 Sets the default number of copies for a copy job This default Default 1 applies when the Copy function or the Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home screen ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 157 Table 2 21 Default Print Options menu continued First level Second level Values Description Default Paper Size Select from a list of sizes that the Configures the default paper size product supports used for print jobs Default Custom Paper Size X Dimension Range 3 8 5 inches Configures the default paper size that is used when the user selects Default 8 5 inches Custom as the paper size for a print job Y Dimension Range 5 14 inches Default 14 inches Use Inches Enabled Disabled Sides l sided Use fo indicate whether the original document is printed on 2 sided one or both sides and whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides For example select the 1 sided original 2 sided output option when the original is printed on one side but you want to make two sided copies Select the Orientation setting to specify portrait or landscape orientation and to select the way the second sides are printed 2 Sided Format Book style Configures the default style for 2 sided print jobs If the Book style Flip style option is select
182. he factory defaults Keep The current 802 1X settings are maintained ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 171 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Reset Security Yes Specify whether the current security No settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults Yes Security settings are reset to factory defaults No The current security settings are maintained 172 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Yes Provides tests to help diagnose network No hardware or TCP IP network connection problems Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server After you select and enable a test and set the execution time you must select the Execute option to initiate the test Depending on the execution time a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed CAUTION Running this embedded test will erase your TCP IP configuration This test performs an internal loopback test An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal networ
183. he sender to resend the fax the fax reception No Fax Detected 324 Chapter 2 Solve problems 17 36 A voice call was made to the fax None ENWW Service settings These items in the control panel menus are intended to be used when an HP service representative is assisting you Settings in the Troubleshooting menu 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Troubleshooting Fax Fax T 30 Trace This is a printed report of all the communications between the sending and receiving fax machines for the last Fax transmission or reception The report contains detailed error codes and other information that might be useful in troubleshooting a particular problem related to sending or receiving a fax Print this report before contacting HP customer support Fax V 34 This setting controls the modem s method of transmission The Normal setting allows the modem to select any of the supported fax speeds up to 33 600 bps The Off setting sets the fax speed to 14 400 bps or lower depending on the speed settings for sending and receiving Fax Speaker Mode In Normal mode the modem speaker is turned on during dialing through the initial connection and then it turns off In Diagnostic mode the speaker is turned on and remains on for all fax communications until the setting is returned to Normal mode Fax Log Entries The Standa
184. he serial number Service ID Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty ENWW Service mode functions 307 First level Second level Value Description Cold Reset Paper When you perform a cold reset the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting If you replace a formatter board in a country region that uses A4 as the standard paper size use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4 LETTER and A4 are the only available values New Registration Roller Yes Reset the counter for the registration roller after replacing No the registration assembly PTT Test Mode fax models only Test the internal modem for the analog fax accessory Hook Operations Off Hook On Hook Generate Random Data Select a value from the list Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from the list Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value from the list Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from the list Generate Tone Dial Number Enter dial number Generate Pulse Dial Number Enter dial number Generate Single Modem Tone Range 1100 2100 Hz Default 2100 Hz Line Measurements Fax Transmit Signal Loss Test Support Continuous Scan 2 sided Save to Disk 308 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW First level Second level Value Description Contin
185. he toner cartridge Lift the jam access covers and remove any jammed paper a the rear door and push down so it is fully opened to a 90 angle CAUTION The fuser can be hot while the we is in use Wait for the fuser to cool efore clearing jams NOTE The rear door has two positions It opens to a 45 angle for the rear output bin and to a 90 angle for clearing jams Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 7 Remove any jammed paper 8 Reinsert the toner cartridge 9 Close the front door ENWW Clear jams 267 Clear jams in Tray 2 or an optional 500 sheet tray 1 Remove the tray from the product 2 Remove the paper from the tray and discard any damaged paper 3 Verify that the rear paper guide is adjusted to the indentation for the correct paper size If necessary pinch the release and move the rear paper guide to the correct position It l click into place 268 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 4 Load the paper into the tray Make sure that the stack is fiot at all four corners and that the top of the stack is below the maximum height indicators 5 Reinsert and close Tray 2 6 Press the front door release button ENWW Clear jams 269 7 Open the front door 8 Remove the toner cartridge 9 Lift the jam access covers and remove any jammed paper 270 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 10 Reinsert
186. his item upgrades the ping test data with current results Select the Yes option to upgrade the data or the No option to maintain the existing data However a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 177 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Link Speed Auto The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network The available settings depend on the product and installed print server Select one of the following link configuration settings CAUTION Ifyou change the link setting network communications with the print server and network product might be lost The print server uses auto negotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed If auto negotiation fails either the 100TX Half feature or the 10T Half feature is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub switch port A 1000T half duplex selection is not supported 10T Half 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10T Full 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10T Auto 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100TX Half 100 Mbps full duplex operation 178 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 100TX Ful
187. his is a test mode used in manufacturing and should not be seen on a normally operating product Recommended action Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition Printing Engine Test Description The product is printing an engine test page Recommended action No action is necessary Printing stopped To continue touch OK Description Time has expired on the Print Stop test Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue Processing digital send job ENWW Description This message is displayed after the user sends an e mail or fax Recommended action No action is needed Tools for troubleshooting 239 LLA RAM Disk device failure To clear touch Clear Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message RAM Disk file operation failed To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message RAM Disk file system is full To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error RAM Disk is write protected To clear touch Clear Description The product is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the mes
188. ht be scratched or dirty Replace the fuser 7 The laser scanner might be damaged Replace the laser scanner Horizontal white lines 1 The photosensitive drum might be scratched or the developing roller might be damaged Replace the toner cartridge 2 The fuser film might be damaged Replace the fuser Black page 1 The toner cartridge ground or bias contacts might be dirty Clean the contacts 2 The primary charging roller might be defective Replace the toner cartridge 3 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply ENWW Solve image quality problems 295 Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Tire tracks This defect typically occurs when the toner cartridge has far exceeded its estimated life For example if you are printing a very large quantity of pages with very little AaBbCc oner coverage AaBbCc AaBobCc 1 The toner cartridge might need to be replaced Aa BoCc 2 Reduce the number of pages that you print with very low toner coverage AaBbCc White spots on black or 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself in the image 2 Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications For more information see the product user guide 3 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 4 The toner cartridge might need to be r
189. ice menu Print or view the event log from the Administration menu 1 2 3 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button Open the following menus e Troubleshooting e Event Log The event log displays on the screen To print it touch the Print button Print or view the event log from the Service menu 1 co 4 Fw NW From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the Service menu On the sign in screen select the Service Access Code option from the drop down list Enter the following service access code for this product 05057512 Open the Event Log menu The event log displays on the screen To print it touch the Print button Clear an event log 1 ou BW WN From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button Open the Service menu On the sign in screen select the Service Access Code option from the drop down list Enter the following service access code for this product 05057512 Open the Event Log menu Select the Clear Event Log item and then touch the OK button 254 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Event log message table General paper jam guidelines For jams of any type check the following e Clear the jam See the Clear jams section of the product service manual e Make sure that the paper guides are correctly positioned
190. icense If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code such as the GNU General Public License and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software then check the product support pages of HP s website hp com to learn how to obtain such source code 2 LICENSE RIGHTS You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA a Use HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software Use means installing copying storing loading executing displaying or otherwise using the HP Software You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the HP Software If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product for example if the Software is a printer driver firmware or add on the HP Software may only be used with such product HP Product Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software b Copying Your right to copy means you may make archival or back up copies of the HP Software provided each copy contains all the original HP Software s proprietary notices and is used only for back up purposes 3 UPGRADES To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade update or supplement collectively Upgrade you must first
191. ification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Print E mail Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print Select to print the notification at this product 138 Chapter 2 Solve problems Include Thumbnail NOTE When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification Table 2 18 Scan Digital Send Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Notification E mail E mail Select to address receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following E mail Address and type the email address for the notification Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Background Cleanup Adjust theBackground Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but d
192. ility Solution Turn off the JBIG setting An Out of Memory status message displays on the product control panel The product storage disk is full Delete some stored jobs from the disk From the Home screen on the product control panel touch the Retrieve from Device Memory button Open the list of stored jobs or stored faxes Select a job to delete and then touch the Delete button Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box You are using the wrong page content setting or the wrong resolution setting Try setting the Optimize Text Picture option to Photograph setting You touched the Stop button on the product control panel to cancel a fax transmission but the fax was still sent If the job is too far along in the sending process you cannot cancel the job This is normal operation No fax address book button displays The fax address book feature has not been enabled Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device s status page drop down menu Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop down menu The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled For all forwarded faxes the product appends the overlay header to the top of a page This is normal
193. ill be run If you select zero 0 the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off Data gathered from the HTTP SNMP and Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed Execute No No Do not initiate the selected tests Yes Yes Initiate the selected tests Ping Test Dest Type IPv4 This test is used to check network IPv communications This test sends link level packets fo a remote network host then waits for an appropriate response To run a ping test set the following items Dest Type Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv node Dest IPv4 Range 0 255 Enter the IPv4 address Default 127 0 0 1 Dest IPv6 Select from a Enter the IPv6 provided list address Default 1 Packet Size Default 64 Specify the size of each packet in bytes to be sent to the remote host The minimum is 64 default and the maximum is 2048 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 175 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Timeout Default 001 Specify the length of time in seconds to wait for a response from the remote host The maximum is 100 Count Default 004 Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test Select a value from O to 100 To configure the test fo run continuously select 0 Print Results Execute No Do not initiate
194. imilar to executing the 3 Partial Clean function for this product Z CAUTION HP recommends backing up product configuration data before executing a 3 Partial Clean if you need to retain customer defined settings See the Backup Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu Reasons for performing Partial Clean e The product continually boots up in an error state Ey NOTE Try clearing the error prior to executing a 3 Partial Clean e The product will not respond to commands from the control panel e Executing the 3 Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems e To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer defined settings e The product default settings are not properly working Execute a 3 Partial Clean 1 Turn the product on Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens Touch the down arrow w button to highlight 3 Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow w button to highlight 3 Partial Clean and then touch the OK button Touch the OK button again SS Touch the Home button to highlight Continue and then touch the OK button 6 NOTE The product initializes ENWW Service mode functions 311 Format Disk The 2 Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive A CAUTION After executing a 2 Format Disk option the product is not bootable Characteristics of a Format Disk e Customer def
195. in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free If HP is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by HP c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some countries regions states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you This warranty gives you
196. in the input tray areas Cause Multiple feed of media Replace the Tray 1 pickup solenoid Solution Replace the pickup roller or separation pad if worn or deformed The registration roller is worn or deformed Replace the registration assembly if the registration roller is damaged or worn The transfer roller is not installed correctly Reinstall the transfer roller The transfer roller is worn or deformed Poor contact of the main motor connector Replace the transfer roller Reconnect the connector J1503 The main motor is defective Replace the main motor 282 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Jam in the rear door and fuser area delivery delay jam Cause Solution Dirt or scratches on the fuser inlet guide e Clean the fuser inlet guide if dirty or if there is a toner build up on it e Replace the fuser if it is scratched The fuser delivery sensor PS2 lever is defective e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the fuser if the sensor lever is damaged Poor contact of the fuser delivery sensor connector e Reconnect the connectors J22 and J24 on the transit inline connector e Reconnect the connector J1608 The fuser delivery sensor PS2 is defective Replace the fuser Jam in the rear door and fuser area delivery stationary jam Cause Solution Multiple feed of media Replace the pickup roller or separ
197. indicate the factory default setting Table 2 16 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Date Time Settings Date Time Format Date Format DD MMM YYYY Use the Date Time Settings menu to MMM DD YYYY specify the date and time and to configure YYYY MMM DD date time settings Time Format 12 hour AM PM Select the format that the product uses to 24 hours show the date and time for example 12 hour format or 24 hour format Date Time Time Zone Select the time zone from a list ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 115 Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Date Time Adjust for Daylight Savings Select the date from a pop up calendar Select the time from a pop up keypad Checkbox If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box A list of scheduled events displays Energy Settings Sleep Schedule Event Type Add Edit Delete Wake Sleep Use to configure the product to automatically wake up or go to sleep at specific times on specific days Using this feature saves energy NOTE You must configure the date and time settings before you can use the Sleep Schedule feature Select whether to add or edit a Wake event or a Sleep event and then select the time and the days for th
198. ined settings third party solutions firmware files and the operating system are deleted E NOTE Rebooting the product does not restore the firmware files e Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location but does not restore any customer defined settings e After executing the 2 Format Disk function the message 99 09 67 displays on the control panel e After executing the 2 Format Disk function the product firmware must be reloaded Z CAUTION HP recommends that you do not use the 2 Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the product service manual recommends this solution After executing the 2 Format Disk function the product is unusable HP recommends backing up product configuration data before executing a 2 Format Disk if you need to retain customer defined settings See the Backup Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu Reasons for performing a Format Disk e The product continually boots up in an error state Gy NOTE Try clearing the error prior to executing a 2 Format Disk e The product will not respond to commands from the control panel e Executing the 2 Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems e To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer defined settings Execute a 2 Format Disk 1 Turn the product on Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot men
199. ines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter if the laser scanner encounters the following conditions e The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation within a specified period of the scanner motor start up e The rotation of the scanner motor is out of specified range for a specified period during the scanner motor drive e The BD interval is out of a specified value during a print operation ENWW Engine control system 27 Image formation system Electrophotographic process The electrophotographic process forms an image on the paper Following are the major components used in the process e Toner cartridge e Transfer roller e Fuser e Laser scanner The DC controller uses the laser scanner and HVPS to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum The image is transferred to the paper and then fused Figure 1 16 Electrophotographic process block diagram Laser beam O Cartridge Laser scanner DC controller Engine controller unit 28 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Image formation process Each of the following process function independently and must be coordinated with the other product processes Image formation consists of the following processes e Latentimage formation block Step 1 Primary charging gt Step 2 Laser beam exposure e Developing block Step 3 Developing e Transfer block Step 4 Transfer Step 5 separation e Fusing block Step
200. inues the normal boot process If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds the product returns to a normal boot the same as selecting Continue If the user navigates to another menu the timeout does not apply Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to open the Preboot menu ENWW Preboot menu options 53 Table 2 1 Preboot menu options 1 of 6 continued Menu option First level Second level Administrator Description This item navigates to the Administrator sub menus If authentication is required and the user is not already signed in the Sign In displays The user is required to sign in Download Network This item initiates a preboot firmware download process A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart USB products USB or Network connections are not currently supported USB Pp Thumbdrive Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions CAUTION Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data A delete confirmation prompt is not provided The system is not bootable after this action and a 99 09 67 error will be presented on the control panel A firmware download must be performed to return the system to a bootable state Partial Clean Change Password Clear Password 54 Chapter 2 Solve problems This item reinitializes the disk removing all data except the firmware repository where the maste
201. irty AaBb 1 The paper might be dirty Use a new package of paper make sure that the AaBbCc paper is stored correctly See your product user guide MORDEN 2 P f fth bl If Print a few more pages to see it the problem corrects itself AaBbCc a j AaBbCc 3 Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser 4 Try using a different type of paper 5 Check the toner cartridge for leaks If the toner cartridge is leaking replace it 6 The cassette pickup roller might be dirty Clean the roller If it cannot be cleaned replace the roller 7 Repetitive dirt marks can be caused by the registration roller transfer roller or pressure roller Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the problem and then replace the appropriate assembly 8 The media feed guide or the fuser inlet guide might be dirty Clean the guide 9 The delivery rollers might be dirty Clean the rollers ENWW Solve image quality problems 291 Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Dropouts 1 Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met 2 Try using a smoother paper 3 If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged replace the roller 4 The high voltage contact of the static eliminator with the toner cartridge might be dirty Clean the contact 5 The photosensitive drum primary charging roller or developing roller might
202. is seated and operating correctly Turn off the product and remove the formatter Reinstall the formatter and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking 6 Remove any external solutions and then try to turn the product on again Ey NOTE If the control panel display is blank but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control panel display formatter or other product assemblies Control panel checks The product includes a diagnostic test mode for the control panel This mode allows you to troubleshoot issues with the touchscreen speaker and Home button Start diagnostic mode A On the rear side of the control panel use a paperclip to press the button inside the small hole in the center of the control panel Ey NOTE Some of the diagnostic tests are for factory use only Exits a test B Selects test settings a Backspace ENWW Troubleshooting process 63 64 Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Checks calibration Selects a test pattern to view on the display Tests sounds Shows the firmware version Factory use only Not applicable for this model LIEDOLBS Adjusts the backlight Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Checks the ambient light sensor Tests the home button Exit diagnostic mode Do one of the following
203. it yT Cartridge Primary charging bias circuit To primary charging roller Todeveloping roller Developing bias circuit Photosensitive drum Transfer roller Transfer bias circuit Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Formatter Formatter heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly While the product is initializing after you turn the product on the LED blinks rapidly and then turns off When the product has finished the initialization sequence the heartbeat LED pulses on and off ENWW Engine control system 25 Laser scanner system The laser scanner system receives VIDEO signals from the DCC and the formatter and converts the signals into latent images on the photosensitive drum The main components of the laser scanner are the laser unit and the scanner motor unit The DC controller sends signals to the laser scanner to control the functions of these components Figure 1 15 Laser scanner system i Formatter l T O P ZAT TTT Pp UU ee Engine controller unit DC controller T T Zi 2 Z D a D Bo D wn wn wn a ol a a x Q E gt S O Q O O x tt O N O 3 ag z Z Laser unit lt O Scanning mirror BD sensor Scanner motor unit Photosensitive drum 26 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Laser failure detection The DC controller determ
204. jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina n kym t m llelasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Ala katso s teeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 775 795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser 360 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW GS statement Germany Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden Das Ger t ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV Bei ung nstigen Lichtverhdltnissen z B direkte Sonneneinstrahlung kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschrankungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen Substances Table China Ae A DAR IRIE P EF PG Rl HEIN BOR TH H E AeA ED RFT en AK tM KNER ZRKA Bik AI HUF BE Pb Hg Cd Cr VI PBB PBDE FENSI ZE X 0 0 0 0 SSFUALZL AE X 0 0 0 0 0 peal aR 0 0 0 0 0 0 YEE 0 0 0 0 0 0 RRS EAR AE X 0 0 0 0 0 HREN E X 0 0 0 0 0 0 ZRELCAM PATRIA E Are A eek Ay SJ T 11363 2006 HBR iil BEA
205. k hardware There are no external transmissions on your network Tools for troubleshooting 173 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description HTTP Test Yes No This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product and tests the HP Embedded Web Server Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it SNMP Test Yes No This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the product Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it Data Path Test Yes No Select All Tests Yes No This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product It sends a predefined PS file to the product However the test is paperless the file will not print Select the Yes option to choose this test or the No option to not choose it Use this item to select all available embedded tests Select the Yes option to choose all tests Select the No option to select individual tests 174 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Execution Time H Range 1 24 hours Specify the length of time in hours that Default 1 hour an embedded test w
206. l Limits auto negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps 100TX Auto 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Troubleshooting menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Troubleshooting menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 27 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Event Log View Use to print a list of the 1 000 most Print recent events in the Event Log For each event the printed log shows the error number page count error code and description or personality Paper Path Page View Shows how many pages were printed Print from each tray Fax Fax T 30 Trace Print T 30 Report Print Use to print or configure the fax T 30 trace report T 30 is the standard that specifies handshaking protocols and error correction between fax machines ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 179 Table 2 27 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description When to Print Report Never automatically Configure the T 30 print report to print after certain events You Print after every fax can choose to print the report after every Print only after fax fakih everyiax send jobs i 1 job sent every fax Print after any fax job received every Sitet send error or every receive error Print only after
207. l circuit The fuser control circuit monitors and controls the temperature in the fuser The product uses on demand fusing The fuser control circuit consists of the following major components e Fuser heater H1 heats the fusing film e Thermistor TH1 and TH2 detects the fuser temperature contact type o Main thermistor TH1 controls the temperature in the fuser contact type Sub thermistor TH2 detects a one sided temperature rise in the fuser and controls the temperature in the fuser contact type e Thermoswitch TP1 prevents abnormal temperature rise in the fuser contact type Figure 1 11 Fuser control circuit H1 Rc FUST film Me iS FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal a Pressure roller TH2 x FUSER TEMPERATURE signal Fuser heater safety circuit DC controller circuit Fuser control circuit 18 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Fuser failure detection ENWW The DC controller determines a fuser unit failure deactivates the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal releases the relay to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions e Startup failure o If the main thermistor does not detect a specified temperature during the start up process of the heater in the wait period o If the main thermistor does not detect a specified temperature during the heater temperature con
208. l panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the multipurpose sensor PCA RM1 8621 OOOCN ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 87 PS3 Tray 2 Paper sensor test Tray 2 paper sensor PS3 1 Remove the Tray 2 cassette and then push on the sensor levers to activate the sensor Figure 2 14 Test the Tray 2 paper sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the Tray 2 pickup assembly RM1 8505 O00CN 88 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW SW235 Tray 2 Cassette sensor test Tray 2 cassette sensor SW235 1 Remove the Tray 2 cassette and then install it to activate the sensor Figure 2 15 Test the Tray 2 cassette sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response make sure that the sensor actuator tab on the cassette is not damaged or missing If necessary replace the switch ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 89 PS4 Output bin full sensor test Test output bin full sensor PS1 1 Raise and then lower the output bin levers to activate the sensor Figure 2 16 Test the output bin full sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the top cover flag or the photo interrupter 90 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS451 Tray 3 paper sensor test Tray 3 paper sensor PS451 1 Remove the Tray 3 cassette and then push on the sensor levers to activate the
209. lace if required 188 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 13 B2 D2 Description Paper input delay jam 1 paper did not reach the registration sensor in time no pick Tray 2 registration or Top sensor Recommended action Recovery steps 1 oe ee Remove Tray 2 Remove jammed paper if present Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge Lift the green flaps for access Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that the paper guides are snug against the paper stack 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type 4 Paper sensor associated with this message TOP Sensor PS215 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the Top sensor PCA RM1 8617 OOOCN 5 Inspect the tray separation pad and pick roller Clean or replace if required 13 B2 DD Description ENWW Paper input delay jam 1 paper did not reach the registration sensor in time Duplexer registration or Top sensor Media did not reach the Top or registration sensor to print the second side of a duplex job Recommended action Recovery steps 1 2 Remove Tray 2 Use the green button to lower the duplex tray Tools for troubleshooting 189 ee eS ew She Open top cover Remove jam
210. lace the sensor PS8001 Close top cover Description The top cover is open Recommended action 1 2 3 4 Close the top cover Make sure that connectors FT1 and FT2 are fully seated on the cartridge door switch SW501 Make sure that the tab on the cartridge door that activates the switch is not missing or damaged Replace the cartridge door assembly if necessary Replace the door switch SW501 Data received Description The product is waiting for more data to continue the print job Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the last page of the job To print the existing data touch the Print button Digital send communication error Description A digital send job failed and cannot be delivered 226 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message Try to send the job again Disk full Delete stored jobs Description The disk is out of storage space and there is not enough space to process any jobs Recommended action e Touch the View Jobs option to view and delete the stored jobs o Touch the Print Faxes option to print and delete stored fax jobs Sign in might be required The error will automatically clear when there is enough disk space to process jobs Disk low Delete stored jobs Description The disk is running out of storage space If the user does not delete stored jobs the disk will run out of space and there will not be enough
211. leshooting 121 Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Hold Off Print Job Enabled Enable this feature if you want to prevent Disabled print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel Held print jobs start printing after the copy job is finished provided that no other copy job is in the print queue Restore Factory Address Book Use to restore all Settings product settings to Copy their factory defaults Digital Send E mail Fax General Print Security Copy Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Copy Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu First level Second level Third level Values Description Copies 1 9999 Configure the default options for copy jobs If Default 1 the user does not specify the job options when creating the job the default options are used 122 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Sides l sided original I sided Use to indicate whether output the original document is 2 sided original 2 sided output l sided original 2 sided output 2 sided original 1 sided output printed on one or both sides and
212. limited warranty statement 332 This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship This warranty does not apply to products that a have been refilled refurbished remanufactured or tampered with in any way b experience problems resulting from misuse improper storage or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or c exhibit wear from ordinary use To obtain warranty service please return the product to place of purchase with a written description of the problem and print samples or contact HP customer support At HP s option HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU A
213. ll be unusable until the system files are reinstalled The ATA secure erase command erases the entire disk including firmware The disk remains an encrypted disk Select the Erase Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data on disk and unlock the disk to allow access to it from any product NOTE The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled Erases the crypto key The disk becomes a non encrypted disk This item provides disk status information if any is available 56 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 4 Preboot menu options 4 of 6 Menu option Administrator continued First level Configure LAN Second level Third level Description Select the Configure LAN item to setup the network settings for the PreBoot menu firmware upgrade The network can be configured obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static IP Mode DHCP IP Mode STATIC Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the DHCP server Use this item to manually assign the network addresses IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask Default Use this item to manually enter the default gateway Gateway Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings Table 2 5 Preboot menu options 5 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Descriptio
214. lve problems ENWW E NOTE After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended Recommended action Replace the staple cartridge Supplies low Description Multiple supplies on the product have reached the low threshold Recommended action Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable 9 NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends Supplies very low To continue touch OK Description More than one color supply on the product has reached the very low condition Recommended action o Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable o To continue printing in color either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the Manage Supplies menu on the control panel 2 NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends Supply memory warning Description Unable to read cartridge data NOTE Any repair required as a result of using cartridges with unreadable cartridge data is not covered under warranty Recommended action Replace the cartridge with a genuine HP toner cartridge Tray lt X gt empty Size Description The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 245 Recommended action Refill the tray Ey NOTE This could be a false message
215. man Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation A WARNING Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements Conforme la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques CEM VCCI statement Japan CORBIS AIAMARRMRECT TORE tR nig CRASS OC BRMEES FROTCEMBVET TOBRAICHEAN odk kehna CEMBHVYET VCCLA Power cord instructions Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating The voltage rating is on the product label The product uses either 100 127 Vac or 220 240 Vac and 50 60 Hz Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet A CAUTION To prevent damage to the product use only the power cord that is provided with the product Power cord statement Japan N mk ASAE BIRI KEHEL ESL MASNER FRIR HHO Ran CAH RECA 358 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW EMC statement China WAAR im ERA Z Pi AY RES HEMACA HT ERAI OP WK im BAP RP RR SK HY 47 AY Ter HE EMC statement Korea
216. med paper if present Reinstall Tray 2 Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge Lift the green flaps for access Remove jammed paper if present 10 Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 2 Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type 3 Make sure that paper is not blocking the duplex paper feed path Follow the instructions displayed on the control panel to clear the paper path 4 Paper sensor associated with this message TOP Sensor PS215 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the Top sensor PCA RM1 8617 OO0CN 13 B2 XX Description o 13 B2 A1 Paper input stay jam 1 paper remained at the registration sensor longer than legal sized media would Tray 1 registration or Top sensor 13 B2 A2 13 B2 A3 or 13 B2 A4 Paper input stay jam 1 paper remained at the registration sensor longer than legal sized media would Tray 2 registration or Top sensor 13 B2 FF Residual paper in paper path jam 1 paper detected in the paper path Tray 2 registration or Top sensor 13 B2 AD Paper input stay jam 1 paper remained at the registration sensor longer than legal sized media would Duplexer registration or Top sensor 190 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Recovery steps 1
217. mercury This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end of life The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett Packard for this product include the following HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525 Carbon monofluoride lithium 0 8g Location On formatter board User removable No Environmental product stewardship program 349 X Be Sth a For recycling information you can go to www hp com recycle or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance www eiae org Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste Instead you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment For more information please contact your household waste disposal service or go fo www hp com recycle Electronic hardware recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware For more information about recycling programs go to www hp com recycle Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH Regulation EC No 1907 2006 of the European Parliament and the Council A chemical information report for this product can be found at www h
218. mmended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 229 EIO not initialized To clear touch Clear Description This file storage component must be initialized before use Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log Recommended action No action is necessary Fax is disabled ignoring call Description The product received a call but the fax feature was not configured with the required settings country region date time company name fax number etc Recommended action Configure the fax with the required settings from the Administration menu on the control panel Finishing process not functional Description The finishing device indicates it cannot perform the requested finishing action like stapling or binding Recommended action The job proceeds without the finishing action being performed Flatbed cover open Description The scanner cover has been opened to access the glass Recommended action Close the scanner cover Fuser Kit Low Description The product indicates when a supply level is low 230 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Replace the fuser kit NOTE After replacing the fuser kit reset the fuser page counter by selecting the New Fuser Kit item in the Reset Supplies sub menu Fuser Kit very low Des
219. monia ethyl alcohol or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product these can damage the product Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen They might seep and damage the product Connect the power cable to an outlet and then press the power button to turn on the product Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clean the pickup rollers and separation pad in the document feeder 1 Lift the document feeder latch 2 Open the document feeder cover ENWW Clean the product 301 4 302 Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water NOTE Lift up the roller assembly so you can clean the second roller Close the documentfeeder cover Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Solve performance problems Table 2 33 Solve performance problems Problem Pages print but are totally blank Cause The document might contain blank pages Solution Check the document that you are printing to see if content displays on alll of the pages The product might be malfunctioning To check the product print a Configuration page Pages print very slowly Pages did not print Heavier paper types can slow the print job Print on a different type of paper Complex pages can print slowly Proper fusing might require a slow
220. n Administrator continued Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can be set for the next time the product is turned on and initializes to the Ready state Show Revision Not currently functional Check the Show Revision item to allow the product to initialize and show the firmware version when the product reaches the Ready state Once the product power is turned on the next time the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is not shown Cold Reset Skip Disk Load Skip Cal Check the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all customer settings this item also returns all settings to factory defaults NOTE Items in the Service menu are not reset Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third party applications Select the Skip Cal item to initialize the product the next time the power is turned on without calibrating Lock Service CAUTION Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service menu access both in the preboot menu and the Device Maintenance menu Service personnel must have the administrator remove the Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk ScanVolume during startup Preboot menu options 57 Table 2 5 Preboot menu options 5 of 6 continued Menu option First level Second level Administrator Startup First Power Options
221. n IPv operation on the print server Off IPv6 is disabled On IPv6 is enabled Address Manual Settings Enable Use this item to enable and manually Address 168 Chapter 2 Solve problems configure a TCP IPv address ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified The stateful auto Router Unavailable configuration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address its configuration information or both from a DHCPv6 server Always Router Unavailable If a router is not available the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv 6 server Always Whether a router is available the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a DHCPv6 server Primary DNS Secondary DNS ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 169 Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy provided list server to be used by embedded applications in the product A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access It caches Web pages and provides a degree of Internet security for those clients To specify a proxy server e
222. n Mode Description A USB wireless networking accessory was installed and is ready for configuration Recommended action HP recommends using a computer and internet browser to configure this accessory Enter the IP address into an internet browser to access the full range of configuration options After wireless functionality has been configured and the changes have been applied turn the product off and then on to exit the Wireless Configuration Mode Wireless is not configured Description A USB wireless networking accessory was attached to the product and was not configured Recommended action To begin configuration turn the product off and then on The product will restart in the Wireless Configuration Mode 252 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Event log messages These messages appear only in the event log For additional numeric messages see the control panel message section of this manual Figure 2 35 Sample event log Event Log vn n Sy IAN TEI Yh UUUUUNQAUAUANANUOUNON 1 DOMNII cor OY Y Q g Product information 2 Event number 3 Date and time 4 Engine cycles 5 Event log code 6 Firmware version number 7 Description of personality 8 Consecutive Repeats ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 253 Print or view an event log Ey NOTE The event log in using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events For a complete event log use the Serv
223. n designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas O3 Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product Hewlett Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR logo is qualified to the U S Environmental Protection Agency s ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products ENERGY STAR Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at www hp com go energystar Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner which might extend the life of the toner cartridge HP does not recommend the full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full time the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable consider replacing the toner cartridge Paper use This product s manual automatic duplex feature two sided printing and N up printing multiple pages printed on one page capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes
224. n performs a disk initialization for the entire disk The operating system firmware files and third party files among other files will be completely lost HP does not recommend this action Access the Preboot menu 1 Turn the product on 2 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When a 1 8 with an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu 3 Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Preboot menu 4 Touch the OK button to select a menu item Cold reset using the Preboot menu 1 Turn the product on 9 The HP logo displays on the product control panel When a 1 8 with an underscore displays below the HP logo touch the logo to open the Preboot menu Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow button to highlight Startup Options item and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow w button to highlight the Cold Reset item and then touch the OK button an un F Q Touch the ERROR ERROR Target for reference type variable varref ID was not found ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR ERROR button to highlight Continue and then touch the OK button oy NOTE The product will initialize Table 2 1 Preboot menu options 1 of 6 Menu option First level Second level Third level Description Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Preboot menu and cont
225. n reseat the fuser Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the fuser 4 Fuser power supply driving circuit error Remove and then reseat the fuser If this product was previously serviced check the connector J50 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the fuser 6 Open fuser breaking of a heater wire Check the power source Make sure the power source meets product requirements NOTE If the power source does not meet the power frequency requirement of 43 to 67Hz the fuser temperature control does not work properly and causes this error If this product was previously serviced check the connector J101 on the DC controller PCA If the error persists replace the low voltage power supply 7 Fuser pressure release mechanism failure Remove and then reseat the fuser Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser Check the fuser pressure release sensor flag If it is damaged replace the fuser Use the manual sensor test to verify that the fuser pressure release sensor PS7 is properly functioning If it is not replace the fuser Tools for troubleshooting 211 4 Use the fuser pressure release drive test in the component test to verify that the fuser motor M2 is
226. nce switch E NOTE Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500 sheet input trays ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 37 Solenoids and clutches Figure 1 28 Solenoids and clutches product _S PS1 V PS8001 V M8002 Table 1 12 Solenoids and clutches product ltem Description SLI Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid 38 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 29 Solenoids and clutches Tray 3 and Tray 4 fi Table 1 13 Solenoids and clutches Tray 3 and Tray 4 Item Description SL3 Paper feeder pickup solenoid CLI Paper feeder pickup clutch E NOTE Tray 3 and Tray 4 are identical 500 sheet input trays ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 39 Tray 1 or Tray 2 Pickup and feed unit The pickup and feed unit uses the following components and processes Cassette paper size detection cassette paper detection fe NOTE To find the following components see Photo sensors and switches on page 36 e PS3 cassette media presence sensor e PS225 media width sensor detects media width after the media enters the paper path Cassette pickup E NOTE To find the following components see Solenoids and clutches on page 38 e SL2 cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid Tray 1 paper pickup oy NOTE To find the following components see Photo
227. nd or overlay the fax Overlay header page Fax Number Speed Enabled Use this item to Dial Matching match fax number Disabled that you type to numbers that are saved as a speed dial ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 143 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes Off When billing codes are enabled a On Default Billing Code prompt displays that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax This prompt does not appear if the Allow users to edit billing codes check box is not checked You can also use the Billing Codes report in the Reports menu to view the list of the billing codes that have been used for faxes that have been sent from the product The list is grouped by billing code and also shows fax details This feature can be used for billing or usage tracking Specify a default billing code for faxing If you specify a default billing code this code displays in the Billing Code field when the user sends an outgoing fax If this field is blank no default billing code is provided for the user Minimum Length Range 1 16 Default 1 Specify the required length of the billing code Billing codes can be between 1 and 16 characters long Allow users to edit Off billing codes On 144 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu co
228. nd touch the Administration button Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel or touch the Print button to 1 Device information 2 Installed personalities and options 3 HP Web services 4 Memory 5 Event log 6 Security 7 Paper trays and options 110 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW HP embedded Jetdirect page ENWW The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page which contains the following information Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates I O Card Ready Figure 2 34 HP embedded Jetdirect page Page 1 tlh if Q P a E i pe ppan 1 General Information indicates the product status model number hardware firmware version port select port configuration auto negotiation manufacturing identification and manufactured date 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received unicast packets received bad packets received framing errors received total packets transmitted unsendable packets transmit collisions and transmit late collisions 4 TCP IP information including the IP address 5 IPv4 information 6 IPv6 information Tools for troubleshooting 111 Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information such as the firmware date codes the IP addres
229. ned for Customer Self Repair If however you require that HP replace them for you this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product Based on availability and where geography permits CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery Same day or four hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits If assistance is required you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time normally five 5 business days The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement With a customer self repair HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier carrier to be used 340 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Customer support ENWW Get telephone support for your country region Country region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www hp com support Have the product name serial number date of purchase and problem description ready Get 24 hour Internet s
230. net caataseten 228 EIO lt X gt disk spinning up sidearietargcvarindetvecians ugvaddedvade edeaenacens 229 EIO device failure To clear touch Clear ccccceesseeeeeetseeeeees 229 EIO file operation failed To clear touch Clear ceceeeerseeees 229 EIO file system is full To clear touch Clear cccesceeeeeeereeeees 229 EIO is write protected To clear touch Clear ccccesseesseeereeees 229 EIO not initialized To clear touch Clear c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 230 Event log ER I iveciadtcawtwsstacunpesdnncentetee tached meenmaannaes 230 Fax is disabled ignoring call 5 c2c veiver Vac ete wade es rae 230 Finishing process not functional cccccccccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeseees 230 Flatbed cover open ssch ceatvssunietuncduadtadan erento vecuatan aeieteearenecs 230 Fuser Kit LOw cdeniitater eee BO aes 230 Fuser Kit very lOW chun amnanistiursahorneisesnisunioreonredeaes qawout unneeded 231 Fuser Kit very low To continue touch OK eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 231 Incompatible lt supply gt cceeceeeesseeteeeeseeteeeeesteeeesenteeeeeseaes 231 Incompatible supplies siccusccescoevderuonsvorscorevorsdnnar ous coear orosonseersites 232 Initializing scanner please wait eseeeseeeceeceeeeestteeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 VAI HIGHIZTICh cia eno pera ae ase ea oT le 232 Install Black Cartridge sai neverssaiataocnnrsineiars iveeesantstbuetoneversunsatars 232 Install Fus
231. ng pages from the document feeder input tray gt 2 8 Close the document feeder top cover 200 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 6 7 Place the jammed page on top of any remaining pages and reinsert them into the document feeder Align the paper guides with both edges on the paper Touch the Start button to continue Check the paper guides check and clean the rollers and separation pad and test the registration sensor If the error persists replace pickup roller assembly separation pad or document feeder 31 WX 10 Scanner failure To continue turn off then on Description The product has detected a scanner ADF fan error Recommended action 1 2 Turn the product off and then on If the error persists replace the ADF fan 31 WX 15 Jam in document feeder Description Originals are jammed inside the document feeder top cover Recommended action 1 owe YN 8 Open the document feeder top cover Remove all paper found Rotate the green wheel to remove any additional paper Remove the remaining pages from the document feeder input tray Close the document feeder top cover Place the jammed page on top of any remaining pages and reinsert them into the document feeder Align the paper guides with both edges of the paper Touch the Start button to continue 33 WX YZ Used board disk installed Description An encrypted board or disk with existing data previously locked to a differ
232. nsists of several types of feed rollers and sensors The product uses a motor and two solenoids to drive the rollers Three media detection sensors detect paper as it passes through the product If media does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time the DCC determines that a jam has occurred and alerts the formatter Paper trays The product has the following paper trays e Tray 1 multipurpose tray all models e Tray 2 500 sheet tray all models e Tray 3 optional 500 sheet input tray e Tray 4 optional 500 sheet input tray ENWW Pickup feed and delivery system 35 Photo sensors and switches 36 Figure 1 26 Photo sensors and switches product PS8001 lt M8002 Table 1 10 Photo sensors and switches product ltem Item Description PS1 PS215 Top of Page TOP sensor PS2 Fuser delivery sensor PS225 Media width sensor PS3 Cassette media presence sensor PS502 Duplex media feed sensor PS4 Face down tray media tull sensor PS8001 Rear door sensor PS205 Tray 1 MP tray media presence sensor SW235 Cassette presence sensor Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 1 27 Photo sensors and switches Tray 3 and Tray 4 i Table 1 11 Photo sensors and switches Tray 3 and Tray 4 Item Description PS451 Paper feeder cassette media presence sensor PS8008 Paper feeder media feed sensor SW461 Paper feeder cassette prese
233. nsor in time 13 A4 D4 paper input delay jam 3 paper did not reach the tray 4 feed sensor in time Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Remove the tray 3 or 4 2 Remove jammed paper if present 186 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 3 4 Reinstall the tray 3 or 4 Remove jammed paper if present Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that the paper guides are snug against the paper stack 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type 4 Paper sensor associated with this message PS8008 Inspect the separation pad and pick roller Clean or replace if required 6 If the pick roller rotates freely it should not make sure that the roller is seated properly If after re seating the roller it still rotates freely replace the Tray 3 or Tray 4 feeder assembly 13 A3 D4 Description Paper input delay jam 2 paper did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time Tray 4 feed sensor Recommended action Recovery steps 1 2 3 4 Remove the tray 3 or 4 Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall the tray 3 or 4 Remove jammed paper if present Troubleshooting and parts 1 2 3 4 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type
234. nt code 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Check the cables connecting the scanner control board 3 If this error occurs after a formatter fax card or hard disk has been replaced check that the formatter is fully seated and the smiley face is illuminated Check the fax card for proper Tools for troubleshooting 199 seating on the formatter If it is not properly seated it can prevent the formatter from seating properly 4 Ifthe error persists replace the scanner control board 30 WX YZ Scanner fan failure To continue turn off then on Description The product has detected a problem with the scanner This error occurs when there is a CPB memory failure and the formatter needs to be replaced Recommended action 1 Turn power off then on 2 If the error persists replace the formatter 31 01 47 Document feeder not detected Description The document feeder was not detected and might not be ADF connected The flatbed glass is still available for scanning Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 31 03 22 Scanner calibration failure Description The scanner calibration failed This could affect scanning picture quality Recommended action Remove any paper in document feeder Turn the product off and then on 31 13 03 Document feeder pick error Description The document feeder cannot pick up paper Recommended action 1 Open the document feeder top cover Remove all paper found Remove the remaini
235. nted images such as magazine clippings or pages from books Photograph Best suited for making copies of printed pictures Job Build Job Build off Use to divide a complex job into Job Build on smaller segments This is useful when you are copying or scanning an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can hold or when you want to combine pages that have different sizes into one job You can use either the glass or the document feeder to scan the original documents Blank Page Disabled Prevents blank pages Suppression in the original Enabled document from being included in the output document 150 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Receive Settings Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Low High Use to configure settings for receiving faxes Rings To Answer Range 1 6 Default 1 Fax Receive Speed Fast Medium Slow Ring Interval Range 220 600 ms Default 600 ms Ring Frequency Range 1 200 Default 68hz Fax Printing Schedule Schedule Touch this to set up a fax printing schedule if you selected the Use Fax Printing Schedule option Add plus sign Edit Delete Always store faxes Always print faxes Use Fax Printing Schedule Print incoming faxes Store incoming faxes
236. nter its IPv4 address or fully qualified domain name The name can be up to 255 octets For some networks you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider ISP for the proxy server address Proxy Port Default 00080 Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client support The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network and can be a value from O to 65535 Idle Timeout Default 0270 The time period in seconds after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed default is 270 seconds O disables the timeout 170 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 26 Jetdirect Menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Security Secure Web HTTPS Required For configuration management specify HTTPS Optional whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS Secure HTTP only or both HTTP and HTTPS HTTPS Required For secure encrypted communications only HTTPS access is accepted The print server will appear as a secure site IPSEC Keep Specify the IPSec status on the print Disable server Keep IPSec status remains the same as currently configured Disable IPSec operation on the print server is disabled 802 1X Reset Specify whether the 802 1X settings on Keep the print server are reset to the factory defaults Reset The 802 1X settings are reset to t
237. ntinued First level Second level Third level Values Description Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional Require preview Disable preview Use the Image Preview feature to scan a document and display a preview before completing the job Select whether this feature is available on the product Make optional The feature is optional depending on the user who is signed in Require preview Previews are required for all users Disable preview Previews are disabled for all users Resolution Standard 100 x 200dpi Fine 200 x 200dpi Superfine 300 x 300dpi Select the resolution for outgoing faxes If you increase the resolution faxes might be clearer but they could transmit more slowly Some file types for example a file that will be processed with OCR require a specific resolution When these file types are selected the Resolution setting might be automatically changed to a valid value Tools for troubleshooting 145 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides 1 sided Use to describe the layout for each side 2 sided of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides als
238. nued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Digital Send Service Allow Usage of Enabled Configure how the Setup Digital Sending product interacts with Software DSS Disabled the HP Digital Server Sending Software DSS server HP DSS handles digital sending tasks such as faxing emailing and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device Use the Allow Usage of Digital Sending Software DSS Server option to configure the product to use HP DSS Allow Transfer to Enabled Use the Allow New Digital Sending Transfer to New Software DSS Disabled Digital Sending Server Software DSS Server option to specify whether DSS management of a product is transferable to a different DSS Fax Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Fax Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 141 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup Fax Setup Wizard Configure settings for sending faxes from the product Use the Fax Setup Wizard feature to set up options for faxing NOTE To set up LAN fax or Internet fax use the HP Embedded Web Server To open the HP Embedded Web Server type the product network address into a Web br
239. o select the 2 sided format that matches the original document Orientation Portrait For some features to work correctly you Landscape must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top 146 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2 Sided Format Book style Flip style Notification Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Book style The back side of the original is printed right side up and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Use to receive notification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print E mail Print Select to print the notification at this p
240. oard cannot 1 Turn the product off and then on As the communicate with the flatbed scanner motor product turns on verify the scan head moves 2 Verify the drive belt is in the correct position 3 Check for a red LED illuminated on the scanner motor 4 Check the cable connection to scanner control board or formatter 5 Replace the scanner 6 Replace the scanner control board 256 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Event log message Description Action 30 03 45 The PCA firmware code controls the motor 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Replace the scanner control board 4 Replace the scanner assembly 31 01 47 ADF was not detected Cable not attached 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Upgrade the firmware 3 Check the cables between the ADF and scanner control board or formatter depending on the product 4 Replace the ADF 5 Replace the scanner control board or formatter depending on product 31 03 30 ADF pick motor is not turning 1 Verify the paper meets the product specifications 2 Make sure the input tray is not overloaded 3 Check the event log for ADF errors and resolve any errors first 4 Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error If the motor turns then the motor is good 5 Verify the motor cables are connected 6 Reseat ADF to scanner control board or formatter cables 7 Replace the A
241. ocal area network LAN Ethernet RJ 45 network port 2 USB port for connecting external USB devices 3 Hi Speed USB 2 0 printing port 4 Foreign interface harness for connecting external devices 5 Fax port Locations of major components Figure 2 25 External component locations eae Stapler cover Description Right rear cover 102 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Item Description ltem Description 2 Formatter cover 8 Power switch 3 Right cover 9 Tray 2 4 Left cover 10 Tray 1 5 Rear door 11 Cartridge door 6 Power port 12 Face down output bin Figure 2 26 Major component locations Item Description 1 Fuser 2 Laser scanner 3 Registration assembly 4 Pickup assembly 5 Duplex media feed assembly Tools for troubleshooting 103 104 Figure 2 27 Motors fans solenoids and rollers component locations Item Description Item Description 1 Fuser motor 6 Main fan 2 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup roller 7 Cassette Tray 2 separartion pad 3 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid 8 Cassette Tray 2 pickup solenoid 4 Transfer roller 9 Cassette Tray 2 pickup roller 5 Tray 1 multipurpose tray separation pad 10 Sub fan Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Figure 2 28 PCA component locations 1 of 2
242. od choOm cena cist asian aries anes eae 347 Power CONSUMPHOMs c0 siwssavavevededsesntinscnniunnndaudbewedle ESE ES E R 347 Tomer COMSUMPHION ecceeeeeecceeceececeaaeeeeeeeeeececeeceececeeauessaaeeeeeeceeeeceseecueeeaaneeeeeeer 347 Pap r Uses cave contedencabuatebaraeibveoeyduscsdoct A EE E R E 347 PASHE iier ingtinn i ee ene e ec E E EE eee 347 AP laserJet print supplies cieren reena anal bap E E RE Eaa E 348 Return and recycling IMSIROCtiONs yasacdieensnwdriennenisnaubetanues hein unane ae inane nienaneeeans 348 United States and Puerto Rico sen ncsiniviovesinausavcdniisiiantiavaeto mabe teuaniaventenndients 348 Multiple returns more than one cartridge cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 348 Single ETON asso eoheaseappnve nue hevendeade anni a N 348 STUUR iesenii nena loupe nae ipsa ie i pene poems 348 Non US returns oreren e a enaa r a ARER aaa 349 Papen aeaa E E E EE EEEE EE E 349 Material restrictions orosenie ee e i tala e E a 349 Disposal of waste equipment by users lt cc0anncacsstadiosonnsaendensadesstanstscenndeaeatscerdineneee 350 Electronic hardware recycling s cariinidnontieanorssnaudvactandeisvarpncgusverenenniadseeriaviameannddurns 350 Chemical substances sicrie kessens lit ct il E ile slits 350 Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS csiacarasoasnsanesasasvuvntaincwosduwsshealognadduess beondanrninedaunenars 350 For more intor Lito ol esenea r E N E EEE E A 350 Declaration of conformi y onses cuise
243. off position You must disconnect the product power cable before servicing the product Figure 1 13 Low voltage power supply LVPS gt Fuse FU1001 Low voltage power supply ANA Fuser an Fuser control circuit AP Rectifying circut Fuse FU1002 Power switch control circuit e o o Power switch 3 3V generation circuit Protection circuit SW240 High volage 43 3V power supply Main motor 24VC ai 24V generation circuit ee g Interlock switch SW260 DC controller 3 3VB 5V ON 5V gt Formatter generation circuit 24VB al Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Overcurrent overvoltage protection The low voltage power supply has a protective function against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit If an overcurrent or overvoltage condition occurs the system automatically cuts off the output voltage If the DC power is not being supplied from the low voltage power supply the protective function might be running In such case turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable Do not connect the power cable or turn on the power switch again until the cause is found A
244. oller in the engine control system controls the operational sequences of the product The following table describes durations and operations for each period of a print operation from when the product is turned on until the motor stops rotating Normal sequence of operation ENWW Table 1 1 Sequence of operation Name WAIT STBY standby Timing From the time the power switch is turned on or the door is closed until the product is ready for a print operation From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period until either a print command is sent or the power switch is turned off Purpose Brings the product to printable condition The product performs the following during the operation e Detects the toner cartridge Maintains the product in printable condition INTR initial From the time the print command is received until the Starts up the high voltage biases the laser scanner rotation temperature of the fuser unit reaches its targeted and the fuser unit for printing temperature PRINT From the end of the INTR period until the last sheet Forms the image on the photosensitive drum based completes the fuser operation on the VIDEO signals from the formatter Transfers and fuses the toner image to the paper LSTR last From the end of the PRINT period until the main Moves the last printed sheet out of the product rotation motor stops rotating The product enters the INTR period as the LSTR period is completed if
245. ollowing menus e General Settings e Print Quality e Adjust Paper Types 3 Select a paper type and then select the mode to adjust 4 Select a value for the mode and then touch the Save button Table 2 30 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu Print Mode Normal mode Heavy Mode Card Stock Mode Transparency Mode Envelope Control Label Mode Extra Heavy Mode Light Mode Extra Light Mode Rough Mode Bond mode Mid weight mode NOTE Not all print modes are available for all paper types 288 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Table 2 30 Print modes under the Adjust Paper Types sub menu continued Resistance Mode Set to Up to resolve print quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low humidity environments with resistive or rough surface paper Humidity Mode With glossy film set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and print quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film With transparencies set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and print quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job With all other paper types set to High when the product is in a high humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job Table 2 31 MP modes under the Optimize submenu COOL _ E_Sa a_Sauaumauauays Line Detail Normal Up Off Environment Set to Low Temp if the produc
246. on e Replace the registration assembly if the registration shutter is damaged or worn Clear jams 281 Jams in the top cover and product cassette Cause The TOP sensor PS215 lever is defective Solution e Check the sensor lever and place it in correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the sensor if the sensor lever is damaged Poor contact of the TOP sensor PS215 connector Reconnect the connector J507 on the high voltage power supply The TOP sensor PS215 is defective Replace the sensor Jams in the input tray area optional 500 sheet input tray Cause The 500 sheet tray separation pad is worn or deformed Solution Replace the 500 sheet tray separation pad The 500 sheet tray pickup roller is worn or deformed Replace the 500 sheet tray pickup roller Poor contact of the 500 sheet tray pickup solenoid drive connector Reconnect the connector J407 on the 500 sheet tray connector PCA The 500 sheet tray pickup solenoid is defective Jams in input tray area Tray 1 multipurpose tray Cause The Tray 1 separation pad is worn or deformed The Tray 1 pickup roller is worn or deformed Replace the 500 sheet tray pickup solenoid Solution Replace Tray 1 Replace the Tray 1 pickup roller Poor contact of the Tray 1 pickup solenoid drive connector Reconnect the connector J1602 The Tray 1 pickup solenoid is defective Jams
247. on pages 112 Print quality troubleshooting JOOS taccaaciateinay osaeutetndoiveeseaunein eluaeiarerea otceraemmenedes 112 Repetitive defects tuletieni tis aie ian aan 112 Control panel MEMUS aise csnnsinerorme deri dees or dousscoudehbribonehoyereorseacyiedeys coheadhe dyneediavios 114 Administration Menu dete acs Aviceaasigaatsr aint tuiias oom nee eae ree ees nade Maule ashen enue eles 114 Reports Menu f2c28e bie Bie nonin Peet aon 114 General Settings MENW posvcniveriedertoniweonthonruerasiorevdea beoiosspacnees 115 Copy Settings Menu riesia E E 122 Scan Digital Send Settings menu red vraiment 130 Fax Settings MENU ee ceeseeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 141 General Print Settings menu cccceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesnaeeees 155 Default Print Options enucntsetas mc conmatcent aca eneean 157 Display Settings menu scisssienvirascouioarvconds onde ebievetteueborstacsiud 158 Manage Supplies menu saciucdeakun cheseuanitoars earn ween omarieermenies 161 Manage Trays Menu sseessessssssssssssrestreeeeessesssssssssssrrrsrreeeeeeseest 163 Network Settings menu ccccccceeeseesenceeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeeseeentaaees 165 Troubleshooting menus a adetcictin seonastanas beaas Canieerareantieea Neaedahabens 179 Device Maintenance Menu seeeseeeceeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaaeeeteeeeeeeess 182 Backup Restore MENU ccccceeesseceeeeeceseeneteeeeeeseeteeeeeee
248. onal injury catastrophic loss of data or extensive damage to the product ENWW iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW Table of contents T Theory of OPS UGG Bs eisisicscsieiceinss sxevscecssasiodsicsdersssniniaiiessanecs ninsnne asasssiossssmnstaimensbsatessiueebncass 1 B sic operation soesoenan E ancionsacehannseeunmes soug wana n tuba avehsbsonsavecoengadehatectaenenaereaaentades 2 Maj r system S x2 sakes iei E E E R E cota aeheeete 2 Product block diagram sa raneansvendevavisaanssantarasteiwers incesnavecunaihalsuconcdpnaacintonnatractdenea 2 Sequence of operation nccascosnssiabsnieniwonniicagoraniaeetbunedinsiiwascisliesdelasalionelutin btnteevadsoncontes 3 Normal sequence of operation jaaivisiondecasreismmicneaniivenennwunimroenunwiem 3 Formatter control system sssnnsssseesooesoeeessseesseetsetetstsotsrsrttesrttrssstsrsoterstterersesssotessotersesrersee esene 4 Auto on Auto off mode cccccccceececcuceeccccacecccceccecaceececauceceuaeeecccaesecsuaeeecsueceeesaeseeeeaes 4 HPO HEIR Oe catia a tesaeeae oan ents a raced aon anna eTOR 5 CPUa E E E E E E E EE E EEE 6 MEMO eae E E E A E E E E EE 6 FirmMWaATE nesses senen i e ERRE E E E T A E 6 Nonvolatile memory Face sata udrecncnn anideanicasans denna weaucn aneneavadauncavanaaiaaeradveanitanes 6 EE E E E E E A E 6 PM E E E A 6 Control panel Serpe cence tenceneameeapedepueeseieorendesacayiedtedeesiattee oreaden atiatnndess EEE 7 Enginecontrolsystem sesionin aasin
249. op cover 2 Remove any visible lint or dust from the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water 3 Close the document feeder top cover 4 On the product control panel touch the Reset button Cleaning disk lt X gt complete Do not power off Description A storage device is being sanitized or cleaned Recommended action Do not turn off the product The product s functions are unavailable The product will automatically restart when finished Close inner flap in duplexer Description The inner flap in the duplexer is open Recommended action 1 Open the lower right door 2 Close the inner flap in the duplexer 3 Close the door Close rear door Description The rear door is open ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 225 Recommended action 1 2 3 Close the rear door If the error persists verity the J8001 connectors is fully seated on the DC controller PCA Use the manual sensor test to verify the rear door sensor functionality If necessary replace the sensor PS8001 Close rear door Or touch OK to print to the rear bin Description The rear door is open Recommended action 1 2 3 Close the rear door or touch the OK button to print to the rear bin If the error persists verify the J8001 connectors is fully seated on the DC controller PCA Use the manual sensor test to verify the rear door sensor functionality If necessary rep
250. or that contains its own power supply USB accessory not functional ENWW Description A USB accessory is not working correctly Recommended action 1 Turn the product off 2 Remove the USB accessory 3 Insert a replacement USB accessory Tools for troubleshooting 249 USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work properly Description Some USB hubs require more power than the product has available Recommended action Remove the USB hub USB is write protected To clear touch Clear Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message USB not initialized To clear touch Clear Description The USB device file system must be initialized before it can be used Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for six seconds after removal of the USB storage accessory Recommended action Touch the Hide button to remove this message USB storage device failure To clear touch Clear Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message USB storage file operation failed To clear touch Clear Description A PIL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation 250 Chapter 2 Solve problems E
251. ou in clearing jams by providing step by step instructions on the product control panel When you complete a step the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure Common causes of jams ENWW Many jams are caused by using paper that does not meet HP specifications For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet products see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide This guide is available at www hp com support jpaperquide The product is jammed Cause Solution The paper does not meet specifications A component is installed incorrectly Use only paper that meets HP specifications See the product user guide Verity that all components are correctly installed You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied A tray is loaded incorrectly Remove any excess paper from the tray Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray See the product user guide The ADF jam access door is not completely closed Press on the ADF jam access door until it clicks to make sure that it is closed The paper is skewed The tray guides are not adjusted correctly Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it The paper is binding or sticking together Remove the paper flex it rotate it 180 o
252. ouch OK cceeeceeeeeeteees 237 Manually feed Size To use another tray touch Options 237 Manually feed Type Size To continue touch OK eee 238 Manually feed Type Size To use another tray touch SOPHONS eseese aeei Mow tees Aan ovaes a EE E EREA 238 Dio POD te cancela si o eaa E hRS ah 238 Open rear door aco hualatateeaseusentane tata otrdtetnesuet oe eaten 238 Q tp t Bin f llen aun Ai pt E e Stier acces 239 Paperless mode essees neasi i ea aa e a a 239 Printing Engine Test seen N A 239 Printing stopped To continue touch OK eeeeeceeeeeeeerteeeeeeeees 239 Processing digital send job ca cco de snsenadeodsupsocuntener qunarsdcsamn taser sins 239 RAM Disk device failure To clear touch Clear cceeeeeeeeees 240 RAM Disk file operation failed To clear touch Clear 0 0 240 RAM Disk file system is full To clear touch Clear ccceeeeeeeereee 240 RAM Disk is write protected To clear touch Clear ceeeeeees 240 RAM Disk not initialized To clear touch Clear 0 0 240 Remove cartridge lock iia cenazsuerarnacestaeaetecnantma ted aesepayardaedaaauss 240 Remove the toner cartridge cccccceseeeeseceeeeeennceeeeeseeeteeeeeees 241 Replace Black Cartridge sic smeccincniwnuuiendasaiie tunedin 241 Replace Document Feeder Kit ccesseeeceeeeceeeeeeennensneeeeeeees 241 Replace Fuser Kitten nei ne haanhetiahdt
253. output rollers Simplex print operation The leading edge of the paper stops 100 mm 3 94 in past the face down delivery stacker rollers Simplex print operation The leading edge of the paper stops 5 mm 0 20 in beyond the output bin full sensor flags Duplex print operation The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and into the output stacker rollers The paper has now reversed direction and stopped 90 mm 3 55 in before the leading edge reaches the outputbin full sensor flags Duplex print operation The leading edge of the paper has passed through the fuser assembly and into the output stacker rollers The paper has now reversed direction and entered the duplex accessory The leading edge of the paper stops about 15 mm 0 59 in after encountering the duplex media feed sensor PS502 e Atter the print job is completed press OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the timer times out e After the timer times out touch the Stop button Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state 6 NOTE Do not try to perform a print stop test while the product is calibrating because you might be required to restart the product If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing activate the door switch Component tests Control panel tests Open the following menus e Administration e Troubleshooting e Diagnostic Tests Available control
254. ow Description The toner cartridge has reached the very low condition Recommended action Actual supply life remaining may vary Consider having a replacement available The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition HP s warranty on that supply has ended E NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends Black Cartridge very low To continue touch OK Description The toner cartridge has reached the very low condition Recommended action Actual supply life remaining may vary Consider having a replacement available The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition HP s warranty on that supply has ended E NOTE When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends Card slot device failure To clear touch Clear ENWW Description The specified device has failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Tools for troubleshooting 223 Card slot file operation failed To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error Card slot file system is full To clear touch
255. ow humidity Down P environments and highly resistive paper Use the Up option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor toner transfer Use the Down option in the event that small oin hole defects occur Humidity Mode Normal Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Line Detail Normal Alternate 1 Off Optimize Environment Normal Enable if the product is operating in a low Low Temp temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Restore Optimize Use to return all the settings in the Optimize menu to the factory default values Resolution 300 x 300 dpi Sets the resolution at which the product 600 x 600 dpi prints FastRes 1200 ProRes REt On Off Tools for troubleshooting 119 Table 2 16 General Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Economode On Off Toner density Default Lighter print Darker print Jam Recovery Auto This product provides a jam recovery Off feature that reprints jammed pages Select one of the following options On Auto The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available This is the default setting Off The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages performance is optimal NOTE When using this option if the product runs out of paper
256. owser To configure the fax features select the Fax tab Fax Dialing Settings Fax Dial Volume Off These settings control how the fax modem Low dials the outgoing fax number when High faxes are sent Dialing Mode Tone Pulse Redial Interval 1 5 Minutes Default 5 minutes Fax Send Speed Fast Medium Slow Dialing Prefix Detect Dial Tone Redial on Error Range 0 9 Default 2 Redial on No Range 0 2 Answer Default O Redial on Busy Range 0 9 Default 3 142 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is Settings Confirmation enabled you must Disabled enter the fax number twice PC Fax Send Enabled Enables users who have the correct Disabled driver installed to send faxes through the product from their computers JBIG Compression Enabled The JBIG compression reduces Disabled fax transmission time which can result in lower phone charges However using JBIG compression sometimes causes compatibility problems with older fax machines If this occurs turn off the JBIG compression Error Correction Enabled When error Mode correction mode is Disabled enabled and an error occurs during fax transmission the product sends or receives the error portion again Fax Header Prepend Use to prepe
257. p com go reach Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS for supplies containing chemical substances for example toner can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www hp com go msds or www hp com hpinfo community environment productinfo safety For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics e Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products e HP s commitment to the environment 350 Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW e HP s environmental management system e HP s end of life product return and recycling program e Material Safety Data Sheets Visit www hp com go environment or www hp com hpinfo globalcitizenship environment ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 351 Declaration of conformity Manufacturer s Name Manufacturer s Address declares that the product Product Name Regulatory Model Numbers Product Options Toner Cartridges Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC 17050 1 and EN 17050 1 Hewlett Packard Company DoC BOISB 1107 00 Rel 1 0 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA HP LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP M525dn BOISB 1107 00 All CE255A CE255X conforms to the following Product Specifications SAFETY EMC Supplementary Information IEC 60950 1 2005 EN60950 1 2006 A11 A1 IEC 60825 1 2007 EN 60825 1 2007 Class 1 Laser LED Product IEC 62
258. panel tests e LEDs test the LEDs on the control panel e Display sequence through display tests ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 95 e Buttons tests the key pad and other buttons e Touchscreen tests the control panel touchscreen For more control panel diagnostics see Control panel checks on page 63 Half self test Perform a half self test to determine which image formation process might be malfunctioning 6 NOTE It might be easier to perform the print stop test to stop the product during the printing process See Print stop test on page 94 1 Print a configuration page from the control panel 2 Open the cartridge door after the paper advances half way through the product which is about 3 to 5 seconds after the main motor begins to rotate The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge 3 Remove the toner cartridge 4 Open the toner cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface assume that the cleaning conditioning writing and developing functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning correctly Troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem If no image is present on the drum perform the drum rotation test check See Drum rotation test check on page 96 Drum rotation test check fey NOTE This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges are in use Th
259. paper Any faxes received while the input tray is empty are stored and will print after the tray has paper Chapter 2 Solve problems The Fax Printing Schedule feature is in use Faxes print according to the schedule To print faxes immediately disable the Fax Printing Schedule feature ENWW ENWW Problem Cause The product is either low on toner or has run out of toner The incoming call might be a voice call Solution If configured the product stops printing as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner Any faxes received are stored in memory and print after the toner has been replaced Incoming voice calls usually show up in the call report as a No Fax Detected error Because these are voice calls and not a fax error no action is necessary The incoming fax was interrupted Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call waiting feature A call waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress which causes a communication error The Fax Printing Schedule feature is set to the Always store faxes option Change the Fax Printing Schedule setting to the Always print faxes option Solve fax problems 319 Problems with sending faxes Problem Faxes are transmitting very slowly Cause You might be sending a complex fax such as one with many graphics Solution Complex faxes take longer to transmit The receiving fax machine might have a
260. paper path for any jammed paper Clear the jam 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Use the product control panel or the HP Embedded Web Server to make sure that the tray is configured for the media size and type 4 Paper sensor associated with this message TOP Sensor PS215 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the Top sensor PCA RM1 8617 OO0CN 13 B9 FF Description Residual Media in Paper path jam 1 paper detected in the paper path fuser output When the product power is turned on paper activates the fuser output sensor and it stays on Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Sw SS SS Open the rear door to second position Open top cover Remove the toner cartridge Remove jammed paper if present Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Close the rear door Troubleshooting and parts 1 Clear the paper path of any jammed paper 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Paper Sensor associated with this message PS2 Use the Manual sensor test to test the sensor If the sensor is not working replace the fuser 13 B9 XX Description 13 B9 A2 13 B9 A3 13 B9 A4 13 B9 A5 or 13 B9 AB Fuser delivery stay jam 1 paper stayed at fuser output sensor longer than it should fuser output 192 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Fuser modes o A2 Normal fuser mode o A3 Light 1 2 fuser mode o A4 Heavy 1 fuser mode o A5
261. placed o Configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu Roller cleaning is recommended Description The product has reached the roller cleaning low count Clean the ADF rollers to maintain image quality 242 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Open document feeder top cover 2 Remove any visible lint or dust from the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint free cloth moistened with warm water 3 Close the document feeder top cover 4 On the product control panel touch the Reset button ROM disk device failed To clear touch Clear Description The specified device failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch Clear Description A PIL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message ROM disk file system is full To clear touch Clear Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the error ROM disk is write protected To clear touch Clear Description The device is protected and no new files can be written to it Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message ROM disk not initialized To clear touch Clear Description Th
262. please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type Flash EEPROM etc SPI Flash Size User Modifiable 4MB amp Yes 1 No Function Contains the boot code and factory product configuration data required for the device to function User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images Steps to clear memory There are no steps to clear this data Type Flash EEPROM etc ICB EEPROM Size User Modifiable 32KB O Yes X No Function Backup device for critical system counters and product configuration information Steps to clear memory There are no steps to clear this data Type Flash EEPROM etc None Size User Modifiable O Yes X No Function Steps to clear memory Mass Storage Does the device contain mass storage memory Hard Disk Drive Tape Backup Yes No If Yes please describe the type size function and steps to clear the memory below Type HDD Tape etc Self Encrypting Hard Disk SATA 1 and SATA 2 Size User Modifiable 250GB amp Yes No Function Stores customer data OS applications digitally signed firmware images persistent data and temporary data used for processing and system functions Note HDD is standard on CF117A model Not Available on CF116A Steps to clear memory There are several ways to erase this 1 Erase and Unlock Encr
263. ppendix A Service and support ENWW HP policy on non HP supplies Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non HP toner cartridges either new or remanufactured NOTE For HP printer products the use of a non HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer However if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non HP toner cartridge or refilled toner cartridge HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage ENWW HP policy on non HP supplies 333 HP anticounterfeit Web site Go to www hp com go anticounterfeit when you install an HP toner cartridge and the control panel message says the cartridge is non HP HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following e The supplies status page indicates that a non HP supply is installed e You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge e The cartridge does not look like it usually does for example the packaging differs from HP packaging 334 Appendix A Service and support ENWW Data stored on the toner cartridge The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product In addition this memo
264. problems 323 Receive fax messages Table 2 35 Receive fax messages Message Error No Description Action Success n a The fax transmission was None successful Blocked n a The receiving fax machine is None using the blocked number feature and is blocking this fax Failed Any The fax might be corrupted or Ask the sender to resend the fax not sent if the error persists contact support Failed 0 Incompatible page width or Ask the sender to resend the fax page had too many bad lines if the error persists contact support Failed 17 36 Lost telephone connection or Ask the sender fo resend the fax interruption between sender if the sending machine does not receiver automatically retry Failed Any besides 17 or 36 General communications issue Ask the sender fo resend the fax where the fax transmission was if the error persists contact interrupted or did not proceed as support expected Space Fail 0 Unable to read or write image Ask the sender to resend the fax file to disk could be corrupt if the error persists contact product disk or no space on disk support Memory Error 0 Out of memory on product If the error persists delete items from the product memory such as stored jobs or saved faxes Print Fail 0 The received image file cannot Ask the sender to resend the fax be decoded enable Error Correction Mode if it is not already enabled Power Failure 0 A power failure occurred during Ask t
265. py function is initiated from the product Home screen The factory default setting is 1 Manual Sensor Test Tray Bin Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of available components Reset Sensors Select from a list of available components Reset Sensors Test the product sensors and switches for correct operation Each sensor is displayed on the control panel screen along with its status Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen Press the Stop button to abort the test Test the sensors in the trays and bins for correct operation Each sensor is displayed on the control panel screen along with its status Manually trip each sensor and watch for it to change on the screen Press the Stop button to abort the test Tools for troubleshooting 181 Table 2 27 Troubleshooting menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Component Test Select from a list of Use to exercise available individual parts components independently to isolate noise leaking or other issues To start the test select one of the components The test will run the number of times specified by the Repeat option You might be prompted to remove parts from the product during the test Press the Stop button to abort the test Print Stop Test Specify the length of time in milliseconds 0 60 000 Continuous Scan 2 sided Scanner Tests Senso
266. r Oor 17 The receiving fax machine is not The receiving fax machine might answering the call ora person be disconnected or turned off answered the call contact the receiver to check the machine Try resending No Dial 0 No dial tone is detected when Verify the phone line is active sending the fax set the sending fax to not to detect a dial tone Failed Any The fax might be corrupted or Try resending fax not sent Failed 0 Incompatible page width or Try resending fax if the error page had too many bad lines persists contact service Failed 17 or 36 Lost telephone connection Try resending the fax between sender and receiver The issue might be due to voice calls interrupting the fax or a person answering the call Failed or Communication Error Any besides 17 or 36 General communications issue where the fax transmission was interrupted or did not proceed as expected Try resending fax if the error persists contact support Space Fail Memory Error Power Failure Unable to read or write the fax image file to disk could be corrupt product disk or no space available on the product s disk Out of memory on product A power failure occurred on the sending fax product during the fax transmission Try resending fax if the error persists contact support If the error persists delete items from the product memory such as stored jobs or saved faxes Try resending the fax ENWW Solve fax
267. r firmware bundle is downloaded and saved CAUTION Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data except the firmware repository A delete confirmation prompt is not provided This allows user to reformat the disk by removing the firmware image from the active directory without having to download new firmware code product remains bootable Select this item to set or change the administrator password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from the Administrator menu Before the password is actually cleared a message will be shown asking to confirm that the password should be cleared Press the OK button to confirm the action When the confirmation prompt displays press the OK button to clear the password ENWW Table 2 2 Preboot menu options 2 of 6 Description Select the Clear disk item to disable using an external device for job storage Job storage is normally enabled only for the Boot device This will be grayed out unless the 99 09 68 error is displayed Menu option First level Second level Third level Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk continued Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock mate a new secure disk to this product The secure disk already locked to this product will remain accessible to this product Use this function to have more then one encrypted disk accessible by the product when using them interchangeably The data stored on the secure disk locked to this pro
268. r flip it over Reload the paper into the tray NOTE Do not fan paper Fanning can create static electricity which can cause paper to stick together The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin Reset the product Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it During two sided printing you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed Reset the product and print the document again Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it The paper is in poor condition Replace the paper The internal rollers from the tray are not picking up the paper Remove the top sheet of paper If the paper is too heavy it might not be picked from the tray The paper has rough or jagged edges Replace the paper The paper is perforated or embossed Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily Feed single sheets from Tray 1 Clearjams 26 The product is jammed Cause Solution Product supply items have reached the end of their useful life Check the product control panel for messages alerting you of supplies status or print a supplies status page see the product user guide to verify the remaining life of the supplies Paper was not stored correctly Replace the paper in the trays Paper should be stored in the p y p pap y p original packaging in a controlled environment Jam locations Use
269. r the power switch pressed e Duration should be 1 second or less e Firmware error problem finding hardware and booting the serial peripheral interface flash memory o Boot process halted Replace the formatter Serial peripheral Green solid Red solid interface SPI flash memory boot e Firmware error problem corrupt or missing SPI flash memory o Boot process halted Replace the formatter HW checks on board Green solid Red solid DRAM e Power on self check failure o Boot process halted Replace the formatter Control panel Green solid Yellow fast flash connection initializes NOTE Control panel communication successtul If an error occurs a message should appear on the control panel display e Formatter to control panel connection failed Boot process continues Check the cables between the formatter and control panel for damage Make sure that the cables are fully seated ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 67 Table 2 8 Heartbeat LED product initialization continued Product initializing Heartbeat LED normal state Heartbeat LED error state state Preboot menu available Green solid Red solid including diagnostics e Diagnostic failure o Follow diagnostic instructions Turn the power off and then on again to restart the initialization process Accessing disk for Green solid Yellow fast flash firmware image NOTE If applicable disk error messages e Control panel not connected
270. ray touch the Help button to exit the message and then touch the OK button to print o To use another tray clear paper from Tray 1 touch the Help button to exit the message and then touch the OK button Manually feed Type Size To use another tray touch Options Description This message appears when manual feed is selected Tray 1 is not loaded and other trays are available Recommended action o Load tray with requested paper o To use another tray clear paper from Tray 1 touch Options to select a different tray No job to cancel Description You have pressed the stop button but the product is not actively processing any jobs Recommended action No action necessary Open rear door Description The paper type for the current print job requires a straighter paper path Recommended action Open the rear door 238 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Output Bin full Description The output bin is full and must be emptied for printing to continue Recommended action 1 Empty the bin to continue printing 2 Make sure that the paper full sensor flag is not damaged and can freely move If the sensor flag is damaged replace the top cover assembly 3 Make sure that the connector J4 on is fully seated on the sensor and connector J1605 is fully seated on the DC controller 4 Use the manual sensor test to test the sensor functionality If necessary replace the sensor PS 1 Paperless mode Description T
271. rd fax log includes basic information such as the time and whether the fax was successful The Detailed fax log shows the intermediate results of the redial process not shown in the Standard fax log ENWW Solve fax problems 325 Product upgrades To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product go to www hp com go II500MFPM525 firmware Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware On the configuration page look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision Firmware datecode and firmware revision examples e 20100831 firmware datecode e 103067_104746 firmware revision Perform a firmware upgrade The firmware bundle is a xxxxxxx bdl file This file requires an interactive upgrade method You cannot upgrade the product using the traditional FTP LPR or Port 9100 methods of upgrading Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this product Embedded Web Server 1 Open an browser window 2 Enter the product IP address in the URL line 3 Select the Firmware Upgrade link from within the Troubleshooting tab NOTE If you get a warning screen follow the instructions for setting an administrator password from the Security tab 4 Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to and then select the firmware file Select the Install button to perfo
272. red in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted not including engine test prints Refurbish Cycle Count Use this item to record the page count when the product was refurbished Document Feeder Kit Count Set the total number of pages that have been fed through the document feeder Document Feeder Kit Interval Total number of pages since the document feeder kit was replaced Clean Rollers Count 306 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW First level Second level Value Clean Rollers Interval Description ADF Count Set the total pages fed through the document feeder Flatbed Count Set the total pages scanned from the flatbed ADF Simplex Count ADF Duplex Count Copy Scan Count Send Scan Count Set the total single sided pages fed through the document feeder Set the total two sided pages fed through the document feeder Set the total copy pages that have been scanned Set the number of scanned pages sent to email Fax Scan Count Copy Pages Count Set the number of scanned pages that have been printed Scanner Settings ADF Settings Leading edge Trailing edge Left Side Front Left Side Back Glass Settings Leading edge glass Left Side Glass Set the calibration values WARNING Do not change these values unless instructed to do so Serial Number Set t
273. replace the high voltage power supply 80 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS1 Rear bin sensor test Test the rear bin sensor PS1 1 Open the rear door until it stops to activate the sensor Figure 2 9 Test the rear bin sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the rear bin sensor ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 81 PS4 Output bin full sensor test Test the output bin full sensor PS4 1 Raise and then lower the output bin levers to activate the sensor Figure 2 10 Test the output bin full sensor 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response replace the top cover flag or the photo interrupter 82 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS8008 Tray 3 Feed sensor Test the Tray 3 feed sensor PS8008 1 Remove the Tray 2 cassette 2 Use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor Figure 2 11 Test the Tray 3 feed sensor Lee 3 Check the control panel display for sensor response 4 If there is no response replace the optional Tray 3 assembly ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 83 PS8008 Tray 4 Feed sensor Test the Tray 4 feed sensor PS8008 1 Remove the Tray 3 cassette 2 Use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor Figure 2 12 Test the Tray 4 feed sensor Ooo 3 Check the control panel display for sensor response 4 If there is no response replace the optional Tray 4 assembly 84 Chapter
274. resent are connected together This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN of this device is 0 0B This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le pr sent mat riel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five 5 0 L indice d quivalence de la sonnerie IES sert indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccord s une interface t l phonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs la seule condition que la somme d indices d quivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n exc de pas cinq The standard connecting arrangement code telephone jack type for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A Vietnam Telecom wired wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products Cn
275. riginal document Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting to increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and darkest color on the page Background Cleanup Adjust theBackground Cleanup setting if you are having trouble copying a faint image Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image For example increasing the sharpness could make text appear crisper but decreasing it could make photographs appear smoother Automatic Tone Default ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 149 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text Manually adjust Optimize For Optimizes the output Picture for a particular type Text of content You can optimize the output for text printed pictures or a mixture Printed picture Photograph Manually adjust Use to manually optimize the setting for text or for pictures Text Use to optimize the text portion of the copy where text and or pictures are on the original Printed picture Use for line drawings and prepri
276. ring signals might not be configured correctly A voice messaging service might be interfering with incoming faxes Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack and then connect a phone Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working Check the ring signal configuration on the PBX system Do one of the following e Discontinue the messaging service e Use a phone line dedicated to fax calls e Decrease the rings to answer for the fax accessory to a number less than the rings to answer for the voice mail Faxes are being received very slowly You might be receiving a complex fax such as one with many graphics Complex faxes take longer to transmit The sending fax machine might have a slow modem speed The fax accessory only receives the fax at the fastest modem speed the sending fax machine can use Wait for the fax transmission to complete The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received is very high A higher resolution typically results in better quality but also requires a longer transmission time If there is a poor phone line connection the fax accessory and the sending fax machine slow down the transmission to adjust for errors Ask the sender to decrease the resolution and resend the fax Ask the sender to resend the fax Ask the phone company to check the phone line Faxes are not printing on the product No paper is in the input tray Load
277. rint engine execution failure Turn the product off and then on If the error persists reload the firmware 47 WX YZ Printer calibration failed 208 Description The print quality calibration failed This message is for development and will not be seen by customers Recommended action Turn the product off and then on Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 49 XX YY Error To continue turn off then on Description A firmware error has occurred This error can be caused by corrupted print jobs software applications issues non product specific print drivers poor quality USB or network cables bad network connections or incorrect configurations invalid firmware operations or unsupported accessories Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists check the following The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem such as a bad interface cable a bad USB port or an invalid network configuration setting The error might be caused by the print job such as an invalid print driver a problem with the software application or a problem with the file you are printing U pgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error See the product user guide for more information 50 WX YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on ENWW Description The product experienced a fuser error o W fuser error code o X fuser mode 0 1 Oo OD N DB OG KR WW N
278. rm the upgrade NOTE Do not close the browser window until the Embedded Web Server EWS displays the confirmation page 5 Select Restart Now from the EWS confirmation page or turn the product off and then on again using the power switch 326 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW USB storage device Preboot menu 1 a 2 2 yee 10 11 12 13 Copy the firmware upgrade file to the root directory of a USB flash drive The firmware upgrade file has a bdl extension Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the product control panel Turn the product on Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens Wait for the Pre Boot menu to appear on the control panel display and then touch the down arrow W button to scroll toAdministrator Touch the OK button to select it Touch thedown arrow w button to scroll to Manage Disk Touch the OK button to select it Touch the down arrow button to scroll to Clear Disk Pwd Touch the OK button to select it The message Proceed with Requested Action displays Touch the OK button to select it Touch the back arrow button to return to the Pre Boot menu home screen Touch the down arrow w button to scroll to Administrator Touch the OK button to select it Touch thedown arrow button to scroll to Download Touch the OK button to select it Touch the down arrow button to scroll to USB Thumbdrive Touch the OK button to select it
279. roduct E mail Select to receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following E mail Address and enter the email address for the notification ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 147 Second level Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued Third level Fourth level Values Include Thumbnail Description When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification Notification E mail address Provide the email address that will receive notifications Content Orientation Orientation Portrait Landscape For some features to work correctly you must specify the way the content of the original document is placed on the page Portrait This setting means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape This setting means the long edge of the page is along the top 2 Sided Format Book style Flip style Use to configure the default style for 2 sided print jobs If the Book style option is selected the back side of the page is printed the right way up This option is for print jobs that are bound along the left edge If the Flip style option is selected the back side of the page is printed upside down This option is for print jobs that are bound along the top edge Select from a list of sizes that the product supports Original Size Use to describe the page size of the o
280. roduct control panel c cccceceeeeceeeeeeesteeeeeeeneteeeeeees 322 Send fax messages ssc cehingsniediardasssveedvincsvinasdonenahiaansusbibamnlerandicunscnbiuheainen 323 Receive fax messages xc jcichincseirant euler nernaueentonaeveeuelenuete 324 Service SCHIMGS rierien darni ei i Eese iEn EE a EEEa ceaqtadelydnaasdnaydvageveageede ES E E OE 325 Settings in the Troubleshooting menu ccsceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenneetseeeeeeeeeennaaees 325 idole UN upgrades noise isore s e E E E E NE 326 Determine the installed revision of firmware ccccccccceceseeeeesseeeeceseeeeceeeeeesseeeeneeees 326 Perform a firmware upgrade a sarpnawsiisa suaseeanraetcewnsesianeniicmnbvialianehicasevinlsuassskobguioinluas 326 Embedded Web Server s sssssssisssessersseessttsstestersstssrtsssisstessersstesressseesee 326 USB storage device Preboot menu cccccecceseseeeeeeseteeeeeeteeeeeseeeesensaaes 327 USB storage device control panel menu ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 328 Appendix A Service and Suppor sssicscsessassinccascsasegeascasenesabawesisvecancatejeansniductincceiieceonvaeaase 329 Hewlett Packard limited warranty statement cccccceceseeceeeenseeeeenseeeeeneeeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeseas 330 HP s Premium Protection Warranty LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement 332 HP policy n nom HP supplies 5 ciicbeasivinnenedvidaa iene uadie sihavdbrtitwinhled alabdueldllevedvnune
281. roduct user guide 4 The pressure roller is dirty the fuser film is scratched or a foreign substance is on the fuser film Use the Fuser Test Page option in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser If the error persists replace the fuser Solve image quality problems 293 Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Repeat defects Repeat image Image example AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBboCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Misformed characters DA Piekara Solution 1 Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself 2 Clean the inside of the product and run a cleaning page to clean the fuser 3 Use the repetitive defect ruler to determine if the defect is caused by the fuser or the toner cartridge gt If the toner cartridge is causing the defect run the print stop test at the 500 msec setting If the test shows a defect replace the toner cartridge o Use the Fuser Test Page option in the Troubleshooting menu to test the fuser If the error persists replace the fuser This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper Verify that the preprinted ink used on forms meet HP specifications for use in laser printers AaBbCc AaBbCc AABLbLCco AABbCo AaBbCc AaBbCc Print a few more pages to see if the problem corrects itself Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP sp
282. rs Retrieve Diagnostic Create device data Create files that Data file contain information about the product Create zipped debug that can help identify information file the cause of roblems Include crash dump 5 files Clean up debug information Send to E mail Export to USB Generate Debug Start Data Device Maintenance menu Backup Restore menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Backup Restore menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting 182 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 28 Backup Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values Description Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time Backups Days Between Backups Enter the number of days Backup Now Export Last Backup Restore Data Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file Calibration Cleaning menu To display At the product control panel select the Device Maintenance menu and then select the Calibration Cleaning menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 29 Calibration Cleaning menu First level Second level Values Description Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning Of Use to select the Auto Cleaning menu or the Cleaning Interval On menu Cleaning Interval Select from a list of cleaning Use to set the interval when the intervals cleaning page should be
283. ry chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product which might include the following the date when the toner cartridge was first installed the date when the toner cartridge was last used the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge the page coverage the printing modes used any printing errors that might have occurred and the product model This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers printing needs The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identity a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP s free return and recycling program HP Planet Partners www hp com recycle The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products HP partners who assist in recycling this toner cartridge might have access to this data as well Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip ENWW Data stored on the toner cartridge 335 End User License Agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT This End User License Agreement EULA is a contract between a you either an individual or the entity you represent and b Hewlett Packard Company HP that governs your use of the software product Soft
284. s Paper Selection Automatic Select from a list of the trays Sides sided Use to describe the layout for each side 2 sided of the original document First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides Then touch the Orientation setting to indicate whether the original has portrait or landscape orientation If it is printed on both sides also select the 2 sided format that matches the original document Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled Use to forward Forwarding received faxes to Enabled another fax machine Type of Fax Job to All faxes Forward Sent faxes Received faxes Fax Forwarding Number Clear fax activity log Clears all events from the Fax Activity Log list 154 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW General Print Settings menu To display At the product control panel select the Administration menu and then select the Genera Print Settings menu In the following table asterisks indicate the factory default setting Table 2 20 General Print Settings menu First level Second level Values Description Manual Feed Enabled Disabled Use to enable or disable the manual feed feature which allows the user to feed paper into the product by hand When this feature is enabled the user can select manual feed from the control panel as the paper source for a job If a tray is not specified as part of a job manual feed is selected
285. s Table 2 6 Preboot menu options 6 of 6 continued Menu option First level Second level Third level Description System Triage Copy Logs If you cannot print the error logs the System Triage item allows you to copy the error logs to a flash drive on the next startup The files can then be sent to HP to help determine the problem Service Tools This item requires the service access code If the product does not reach the Ready state you can use this item to print the error logs The logs can be copied to a USB storage accessory when the product is initialized and then these files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password Subsystems For manufacturing use only Do not change these values Developer Tools Netexec ENWW Preboot menu options 59 Current settings pages Printing the current settings pages provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the troubleshooting process 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages 3 Select the Current Settings Page option 4 Touch the Print button to print the report 60 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation the prod
286. s and the e mail gateways is especially helpful while servicing the product This information is on the various configuration pages Table 2 14 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Firmware date codes When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure all of these firmware components are upgraded Specific information DC controller Configuration page Look on the main configuration page under Device Information Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page under Device Information Embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the embedded Jetdirect page under General Information Accessories and internal storage All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page In addition separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory These pages list more detailed information for those devices External disk optional Look on the main configuration page under Installed Personalities and Options Shows model and capacity Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page under Installed Personalities and Options Shows model and ID Total RAM Look on the main configuration page under Memory Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page under Paper Trays and Options Additional 500 sheet feeders
287. s failed For link failures check all the network cable connections In addition you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control panel menus 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Network Settings e Embedded Jetdirect Menu e Link Speed 3 Select the appropriate link speed and then touch the OK button Engine diagnostics The product contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality paper path noise assembly and timing issues Engine test button To verify that the product engine is functioning print an engine test page Print the engine test pages E NOTE A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test If the engine test page does not print try removing the formatter and performing the engine test again If the engine test is then successful the problem is in the formatter the control panel or the cable that connects them together 1 Remove the formatter cover ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 69 2 Press the engine test page button Figure 2 1 Locating the engine testpage switch The test page should have a series of horizontal lines The test page prints from the last tray that the product used to print unless the product has been turned off and then turned on again since the most recent print job
288. sage Do not display This option prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing Use Another Tray Enabled Use to turn on or off the control panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray Disabled is empty Two options are available Enabled When this option is selected the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray Disabled When this option is selected the user is not given the option of selecting a different tray The product prompts the user to add paper to the tray that was initially selected Alternative Letterhead Mode Disabled Use to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way for all print jobs Enabled whether you are printing to one side of the sheet or to both sides of the sheet When this option is selected load the paper as you would for printing on both sides See the user documentation that came with the product for instructions about loading letterhead for printing on both sides When this option is selected the product speed slows to the speed required for printing on both sides 164 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 24 Manage Trays menu continued First level Values Description Duplex Blank Pages Auto Control how the product handles two sided jobs duplexing Two options are available Yes Auto This option enables Smart Duplexing which instructs the product not to process
289. sage RAM Disk not initialized To clear touch Clear Description The RAM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system Remove cartridge lock Description The product has been turned on with a cartridge shipping lock installed on the toner cartridge 240 Chapter2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action 1 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge Pull the orange tab to remove the strip Remove the paper with the plastic insert Pb WN Reinstall cartridge and then close the top cover Remove the toner cartridge Description The product is component testing the belt Recommended action o To perform the test remove the toner cartridge gt To cancel the test touch the Stop button Replace Black Cartridge Description The black cartridge has reached the out condition Recommended action Install a new toner cartridge Replace Document Feeder Kit Description The document feeder kit is very low Recommended action Install a new document feeder roller assembly and a separation pad assembly Replace Fuser Kit Description The product indicates when the fuser kit is at its estimated end of life The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation Have a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable The fuser kit does not need to be r
290. sensors and switches on page 36 and Solenoids and clutches on page 38 e PS205 Tray 1 multipurpose tray media presence sensor e SL1 Tray 1 multipurpose tray pickup solenoid 40 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW Paper pickup and feed The following figure shows the pickup and feed paper path 6 NOTE Duplex models include a duplex media feed path for automatic two sided printing Figure 1 30 Pickup feed and delivery block diagram ot Delivery ler Simplex media path nunnnnnnnnn Duplex mediaath ENWW Tray 1 or Tray 2 Al Jam detection The product uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check for jams If media does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified time the ECU determines that a jam has occurred and alerts the formatter E NOTE To find the following components see Photo sensors and switches on page 36 Table 1 14 Sensors Paper Jam Sensors PS2 fuser delivery sensor PS215 Top of Page TOP sensor PS502 Duplex media feed sensor Media present sensors PS4 Face down tray media full sensor PS225 Media width sensor PS8008 Paper feeder media feed sensor NOTE PS8008 is used in Tray 3 and Tray 4 The product detects the following jams 42 Chapter 1 Pickup delay jam Pickup stationary jam Delivery delay jam Delivery stationary jam Fuser wrapping jam Door open jam Residual media jam Duplex repickup jam
291. ser guide 3 Open the Administration menu at the product control panel Open the General Settings menu and then open the Print Quality menu Increase the Toner density setting 4 Try using a different type of paper 5 The toner cartridge might be reaching its estimated end of life Check the supplies status and replace the toner cartridge if necessary 290 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 32 Image defect examples continued Problem Image example Solution Perform the following test Stop a print job during the print operation before it is complete then remove the toner cartridge Open the photosensitive drum shield and look at the toner image on the drum o If the image is not fully transferring to the page replace the transfer roller If the toner on the drum is faint replace the laser scanner 6 The transfer roller shaft might be dirty Remove the transfer roller and clean the shaft to ensure good contact 7 If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged replace the roller 8 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply 9 The laser scanner might be damaged Replace the laser scanner If replacing the laser scanner does not resolve the problem and the high voltage power supply was not replaced step 8 replace the high voltage power supply Specks front or back of Specks might appear on a page after a jam has been cleared the page is d
292. shooting and parts o Paper sensor associated with this message Rear cover PS51 WG8 5935 O00CN o Paper sensor associated with this message Toner door switch SW501 WC4 5171 O00CN 13 D3 FF or 13 B2 FF Description Residual Media in Paper path jam 1 or 2 paper detected in the paper path When the product power is turned on paper remains in the paper path triggering the duplex sensor e 13 D3 FF Duplexer o 13 B2 FF Registration or Top sensor Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Remove Tray 2 Remove jammed paper if present Use the green button to lower the duplex tray gt oe N Remove jammed paper if present ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 195 5 Close the duplex tray 6 Reinstall Tray 2 Troubleshooting and parts 1 Make sure that there are no residual pieces of paper are in the paper path that could cause the paper to jam in this area 2 Make sure that the media meets specification in both type and size for duplexing Minimum paper size is 210 x 280 mm 8 27 x 11 inches to 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 3 Perform a paper sensor test and confirm correct operation of all sensors In particular check the Duplexer Paper Sensor in the following manner a At the start of the Paper Sensor Test the duplexer sensor third digit of the four in the upper left of the display should be O at the start of the test all four digits should be O b Remove the cassette and release the duplexer pan when in
293. slow modem speed The fax accessory only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use Wait for the fax transmission to complete The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received is very high A higher resolution typically results in better quality but also requires a longer transmission time Decrease the resolution and change the Optimize Text Picture option If there is a poor phone line connection the fax accessory and the receiving fax machine slow down the transmission to adjust for errors Cancel and resend the fax Ask the phone company check the phone line The document might have a gray background which can increase fax transmission time Use the Image Adjustment feature to clean up the background shading Faxes quit during sending The receiving fax machine might be malfunctioning Try sending to another fax machine The phone line might not be working Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack and connect a phone Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working The phone line might be noisy or poor quality A call waiting feature might be active Try using a slower fax speed to improve the reliability of transmission Use the Fax Dialing Settings menu to set the fax speed for sending faxes Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call waiting feature A call waiting notice can interrup
294. storage file system is full To clear touch Clear eee Used supply ti USE ates coasts iy rin EEA A O EA h Used supply installed To continue touch OK ssssssnonisoesseeeeeese Warming Up SCANNET wie caccne naka bleielehadnuawaleeminatennas Wireless Configuration Mode ccesceeeeseeeenseeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeas xiii xiv Event logi messages tenie iee EA A a a a aR ORI 253 Print or view an event log siisuidriniivswsetousibossesuertonntsonancinev bested tkobsvomuseoney ees 254 Clear an event log sacseciseacecarsdateeiotys ata qachiamatuarernigessuteuas srosaacl aie 254 Event logimessdge table weiss ities sunaiecues E RA 255 CIRO IIS snina ningeona nannaa ea a n a O a a EET A E N 0 Auto navigation for clearing jams di lt csspoasatee nasaesandeanaseviwtaavedatetnd es tasemarvaeap av tectes 0 Gommon ca sesiof jams r A on A te uae ta sees parca ot Sik ek tena aie ad ell scat teak eds 0 NEE IGG NS ca sacyltaste att tobingheta antwehecransieai ait Gheks e a stag E EA aa 0 Clear jams in the document feeder cccccccceesceesesseeeeesenceeeecseeeeeeneneeeeeesenseeeeeaes 0 Clear jams in the ouipubrbiniared ncidawearcemanie a wera mene ur nman 0 Clear jams ttt Thay I wevciasccigsitioaairyns enadeig tl treaitenbenoramowbinceaiinenaey mal bigtihinbentabs 0 Clear jams in Tray 2 or an optional 500 sheet tray ceeeseeeecceeeeeecteeeeeeentteeeeeeeeeeees 0 Clear jams in the toner cartridge area 4 0 2sieiuectieivinn
295. systems that use the phone line for notifications to a monitoring company e PBX system A business environment phone system Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an analog phone signal Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory You need to have access to a standard analog phone connection to be able to send and receive faxes e _ Roll over lines A phone system feature where a new call rolls over to the next available line when the first incoming line is busy Try attaching the product to the first incoming phone line The fax accessory answers the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings to answer setting NOTE Roll over lines can cause problems with receiving faxes Using roll over lines with this product is not recommended Ey NOTE Roll over lines can cause problems with receiving faxes Using roll over lines with this product is not recommended Are you using a surge protection device A surge protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines These devices can cause some fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices connect the product directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge protection
296. t a fax call in progress which causes a communication error The fax accessory is receiving faxes but is not sending them If the fax accessory is on a PBX system the PBX system might be generating a dial tone the fax accessory cannot detect Disable the detect dial tone setting There might be a poor phone connection Try again later The receiving fax machine might be malfunctioning Try sending to another fax machine The phone line might not be working Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack and connect a phone Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working 320 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW Problem Outgoing fax calls keep dialing Faxes you send are not arriving at the receiving fax machine Cause The fax accessory automatically redials a fax number if the Redial on Busy option is on or if the Redial on No Answer option is on The receiving fax machine might be turned off or might have an error condition such as being out of paper A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number or there are other jobs ahead of it waiting to be sent Solution This is normal operation If you do not want the fax to retry set the Redial on Busy option to O set the Redial on No Answer option to O and set the Redial on Error option to O Ask the recipient to make sure the fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes
297. t is operating in a low temperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image Restore Optimize Use this item to reset the menu defaults Use manual print modes 289 Solve image quality problems Image defect examples These examples identify the most common print quality problems Table 2 32 Image defect examples Problem Image example Solution Blank page 1 The laser scanner shutter on the toner cartridge might be damaged Replace the toner cartridge 2 The laser scanner shutter on the laser scanner might be damaged Replace the laser scanner 3 The laser scanner might be damaged Replace the laser scanner 4 Poor developing bias with the cartridge contacts Clean the contact on the toner cartridge 5 The high voltage power supply might be damaged Replace the high voltage power supply Light print partial page 1 Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed Cc 2 The toner cartridge might be almost empty Check the supplies status and Cc replace the toner cartridge if necessary Cc Cc 3 The paper might not meet HP specifications for example the paper is too moist or too rough Cc Light print entire page 1 Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed 2 Make sure that the Economode setting is turned off at the control panel and in the print driver For more information see the product u
298. t the copies to be bound along the top edge Flip style original Book style copy The back side of the original is printed upside down but the back side of the copy is printed rightside up Use this option when the original is bound along the top edge but you want the copies to be bound along the left edge 124 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Collate Collate on Sets in page If you are making more order than one copy select the Collate on Sets in page Collate off Pages order option to assemble grouped the pages in the correct order in each set of copies Select the Collate off Pages grouped option to group the same pages together For example if you are making five copies of an original document that has two pages all five first pages would be grouped together and all five second pages would be grouped together Reduce Enlarge Scaling Auto Use to scale the size of the document up or down 100 Select one of the predefined percentages or select the Scaling field and type a percentage between 25 and 400 125 TheAuto option automatically scales the 150 image to fit the paper size in the tray 75 50 200 NOTE To reduce the Range X Y 25 400 image select a scaling percentage that is less than 100 To enlarge the image select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100 Auto
299. t the back of the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated Tray lt X gt overfilled To use another tray touch Options Description Too much paper was loaded into the indicated tray 246 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray or touch the OK button to use another tray ye NOTE If this message appears after litter drive assembly was removed or replaced make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated Type mismatch Tray lt X gt Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed Printing can continue from other trays 1 Load the correct paper in the specified tray 2 At the control panel verify the type configuration Unable to cancel firmware update job Description The product is processing of downloading a remote firmware upgrade and cannot cancel it Recommended action Firmware updates cannot be canceled once started The product will restart automatically to complete the firmware update Unable to install the firmware ENWW Description The product displays this message when one of the following conditions occurs during a firmware upgrade gt A file I O error occurs when there is an interruption while reading the firmware
300. ta aatvaye eck nas ts Maen abeRaa 241 Replace staple cartridge iscc iciceesvrecevsnssaeedscededesdrernantnacesouens 242 Replace SHO PIES cas nacenexrondtivedy cadisaasiens E E E aA 242 Roller cleaning is recommended ccescecceeeeeeenteeeeeeeestteeeees 242 ROM disk device failed To clear touch Clear ceeceeceeteees 243 ENWW ENWW ROM disk file operation failed To clear touch Clear eeee ROM disk file system is full To clear touch Clear ccceeeeseee ROM disk is write protected To clear touch Clear ccceeeeeees ROM disk not initialized To clear touch Clear eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Size mismatch in Tray lt X gt teen oisna cat ornate eran etek Standard bin full Remove all paper from bin ccccceeeeceeeees Staple Cartridge lows sanceiredetrsaveretuagswietvacieds ave eis vecuedaaetornes Staple Cartridge very low To continue touch OK wo ceeeeeeeeeee Supplies OW wis warodakisynuvears eenia i brent tbinhon Ear ania Supplies very low To continue touch OK o oo eeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeees Supply memory warning wiser manatee eamalanees Tray lt X gt empty Size ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeees Tray lt X gt empty Type Size ceeeecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Tray lt XSOpen wince einer ar E S Tray lt X gt overtilled Remove excess paper ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees Tray lt X gt overtilled To use ano
301. terrupter WG8 5935 000CN or the top cover assembly RM1 8516 OOOCN 13 E1 XX Description 13 E1 D2 13 E1 D3 13 E1 D4 13 E1 D5 or 13 E1 DB Fuser delivery delay jam 2 paper did not reach the output bin full sensor in time output bin full Fuser modes o E2 Normal fuser mode o E3 Light 1 2 fuser mode o E4 Heavy 1 fuser mode o _E5 Heavy 2 fuser mode e EB Overhead transparency fuser mode Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Open the rear door to second position 2 Remove jammed paper if present 3 Close the rear door ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 197 Troubleshooting and parts 1 Remove all paper and check for residual pieces that could cause the media not to move along the paper path 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Paper sensor associated with this message PS4 Replace the photointerrupter WG8 5935 000CN or the top cover assembly RM1 85 16 OOOCN 20 00 00 Insufficient memory lt Device gt To continue touch OK Description The product has experienced a memory error You might have tried to transfer too many fonts or macros Recommended action Touch the OK button to print the transferred data Some data might be lost Reduce the page complexity or add product memory 21 00 00 Page too complex To continue touch OK Description The page decompression process was too slow for the product Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue There may be some data
302. tes or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you U S GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS Software was developed entirely at private expense All Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations Accordingly pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12 212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227 7202 use duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U S Government or a U S Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License Agreement except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS You will comply with all laws rules and regulations i applicable to the export or import of the Software or ii restricting the Use of the Software including any restrictions on nuclear chemical or biological weapons proliferation RESERVATION OF RIGHTS HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA End User License Agreement 337 2009 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Rev 04 09 338 Appendix A Service and support ENWW OpenSSL ENWW This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INC
303. the CD that came with the 50 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW ENWW product You can also download the print driver from this Web site www hp com go Ii500MFPM525 software Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past If this solution works then the problem is with the program If this solution does not work the document does not print complete these steps a Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed If you connected the product to the network connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable Redirect the product to the correct port or reinstall the software selecting the new connection type that you are using Solve problems checklist 51 Menu map You can print a report of the complete Administration menu so you can more easily navigate to the individual settings you need 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e Reports e Configuration Status Pages 3 Select the Administration Menu Map option 4 Touch the Print button to print the report 52 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Preboot menu options If an error occurs while the product is initializing an error message displays on the control panel display The user can open the Preboot menus The error menu item will not be seen if an error did not occur A CAUTION The Format Disk optio
304. the copy is printed rightside up Use this option when the original is bound along the top edge but you want the copies to be bound along the left edge Output Bin Automatic Standard bin correct order Rear bin straightest path ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 127 Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description Optimize Text Picture Manually adjust Optimize For slider Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content Text Printed picture Photograph Manually adjust Use to manually optimize the setting for each document Printed picture Use for line drawings and preprinted images such as magazine clippings or pages from books If you see bands of irregular color or intensity on copies try selecting the Printed picture setting to improve the quality Photograph Use for photographic prints Pages per Sheet Page Order Add Page Borders One 1 Two 2 Four 4 Right then down Down then right Copies multiple pages onto one sheet of paper NOTE Before using this screen use the Content Orientation screen to describe the original document orientation If you are printing four pages per sheet select the page order To print the pages in rows select the Right then down option To print the pages in columns select the Down then right option If you are printing two or
305. the formatter sends another print command Basic operation 3 Formatter control system The formatter is responsible for the following procedures e Controlling sleep mode e Receiving and processing print data from the various product interfaces e Monitoring control panel functions and relaying product status information through the control panel and the network or bidirectional interface e Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA e Storing font information e Communicating with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface The formatter receives a print job from the network or bidirectional interface and separates it into image information and instructions that control the printing process The DC controller PCA synchronizes the image formation system with the paper input and output systems and then signals the formatter to send the print image data The formatter also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for one EIO card and an additional DIMM Auto on Auto off mode This feature conserves power after the product has been idle for an adjustable period of time When the product is in this mode the control panel backlight is turned off but the product retains all settings downloaded fonts and macros The setting is enabled by default The product enters this mode after a 60 minute idle time or by touching the sleep button Power Status of
306. the high voltage power supply Jams in the rear door and fuser area fuser wrapping jam Cause The fuser film or the pressure roller is defective Solution Replace the fuser Jams in the rear door fuser and duplex areas duplex models duplex re pickup jam Cause The face down delivery roller is worn or deformed Solution Replace the delivery assembly Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Jams in the rear door fuser and duplex areas duplex models duplex re pickup jam Cause Solution The duplex media feed sensor PS502 lever is defective e Check the sensor lever and place it in the correct position to move smoothly and freely e Replace the high voltage power supply if the sensor lever is damaged Poor contact of the duplex media feed sensor PS502 Reconnect the connector J501 on the high voltage power connector supply The duplex media feed sensor is defective Replace the high voltage power supply ENWW Clear jams 285 Solve paper handling problems The product picks up multiple sheets of paper The product does not pick up paper The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper The product picks up multiple sheets of paper If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray try these solutions 1 6 Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it rotate it 180 degrees and flip it over Do not fan the paper Return the stack of paper to
307. the pan is in its full down position the duplexer sensor digit should be 1 T when the flag is in the full 1 when the flag is in c Ifthe sensor flag is manually moved it the digit should show a down position a O as the flag moves to the middle position and a the full up position d Ifthe sensor does not respond as described above replace the HVPS assembly RM1 6280 O00CN e Ifthe sensor is working properly the error only happens on a duplex job and the media is jammed in the rear door or in the fuser with only one side printed replace the pendulum assembly RM1 6598 O000CN f Ifthe error persists replace the lower paper feed guide P N RM1 6263 000CN 13 D3 XX Description 13 D3 D2 13 D3 D3 13 D3 D4 13 D3 D5 or 13 D3 DB Duplex re feed jam 1 paper did not reach the duplex sensor in time duplexer Fuser modes o D2 Normal fuser mode gt D3 Light 1 2 fuser mode D4 Heavy 1 fuser mode o D5 Heavy 2 fuser mode o DB Overhead transparency fuser mode 196 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Recommended action Recovery steps 1 Open the rear door to second position 2 Remove jammed paper if present 3 Close the rear door Troubleshooting and parts 1 Remove all paper and check for residual pieces that could cause the media not to move along the paper path 2 Make sure that the paper meets HP specifications 3 Paper sensor associated with this message PS4 Replace the photoin
308. the toner cartridge 11 Close the front door Clear jams in the toner cartridge area 1 Press the front door release button ENWW Clear jams 271 2 Open the front door 3 Remove the toner cartridge 4 Lift the jam access covers and remove any jammed paper 272 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 5 6 Clear jams in the rear door and the fuser area 1 Reinsert the toner cartridge Close the front door a the rear door and push down so it is fully opened to a 90 angle CAUTION The fuser can be hot while the tae is in use Wait for the fuser to cool efore clearing jams NOTE The rear door has two positions It opens to a 45 angle for the rear output bin and to a 90 angle for clearing jams ENWW Clear jams 273 2 Remove any jammed paper 3 Press the front door release button 4 Open the front door 274 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 5 Remove the toner cartridge 6 Lift the jam access covers and remove any jammed paper 7 Reinsert the toner cartridge ENWW Clearjams 275 8 Close the front door 9 Close the rear door Clear jams in the duplexer 1 Completely remove Tray 2 from the product 276 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 2 Push the green button to release the duplex pan 3 Remove any jammed paper 4 Close the d
309. the tray Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product Use paper that is not wrinkled folded or damaged If necessary use paper from a different package Make sure the tray is not overfilled If it is remove the entire stack of paper from the tray straighten the stack and then return some of the paper to the tray Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications The product does not pick up paper If the product does not pick up paper from the tray try these solutions 1 2 3 4 Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the product control panel Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper Adjust the guides to the appropriate indentation in the tray Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually Load paper and continue The rollers above the tray might be contaminated Clean the rollers with a lint free cloth dampened with warm water 286 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW The document feeder jams skews or picks up multiple sheets of paper e The original might have something on it such
310. the user manual If you experience network compatibility issues please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett Packard help desk in the country region of operation Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator New Zealand Telecom Statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above alll it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for New Zealand Additional FCC statement for telecom products US This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TX
311. ther entity or individual The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges Industry Canada CS 03 requirements ENWW Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company Additional statements for telecom fax products 363 cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if p
312. ther tray touch Options Type mismatch Tray lt X gt ct oe acetic as avant niente aeons Unable to cancel firmware update job ccccceeeseeeeesteeeeeeees Unable to install the firmware cccccecesseeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees Unsupported drive installed cceeeecececeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeees Unsupported supply in use cecccccceeeeesseeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees Unsupported supply installed ceccccecececeeeeeeeetnneeeeeeeeeeeees Unsupported supply installed To continue touch OK eee Unsupported tray configuration ccccceecccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeees Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on ceeeeeeeeeeeeees USB accessory needs too much power Remove USB and turn off HG IN OD Puciscbs tara lo tne A thse USB accessory not functional jens onion tian Cae eee USB hubs are not fully supported Some operations may not work el o 81 1 dy ate reenter rect ee Matera tter dry cree ttre ter err eee ete eran eee USB is write protected To clear touch Clear cccceceeeeeeeeeeees USB not initialized To clear touch Clear cccceeeeeesteeeeeeenees USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data USB storage device failure To clear touch Clear cceeeeseees USB storage file operation failed To clear touch Clear USB
313. this illustration to identify locations of jams In addition instructions appear on the product control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and on how to clear it NOTE Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles or green labels 1 Documentfeeder area 2 Output bin area 3 Top cover and toner cartridge area 4 Tray 1 area 5 Tray 2 pickup area Duplexing area remove Tray 2 for access 6 Rear door area 262 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in the document feeder 1 Lift the latch to release the document feeder cover 2 Open the document feeder cover ENWW Clear jams 263 3 Lift the jam access door and remove any jammed paper If necessary rotate the green wheel at the front of the document feeder to remove jammed paper 4 Close the document feeder Close the documentfeeder cover Clear jams in the output bin area 1 If paper is visible from the output bin grasp the leading edge and remove it 264 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Clear jams in Tray 1 1 If most of the sheet of paper is visible in the tray slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product If most of the sheet of paper has been pulled inside the product continue with the following steps 2 Press the front door release button 3 Open the front door ENWW Clear jams 265 4 266 Remove t
314. tinued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Notification Do not notify Notify when job completes Notify only if job fails Configure to receive notification about the status of a sent document Do not notify Turns off this feature Notify when job completes Select to receive notification for this job only Notify only if job fails Select to receive notification only if the job is not sent successfully Print E mail E mail Select to receive the notification in an email Touch the text box following E mail Address and enter the email address for the notification Include Thumbnail Notification E mail address Stamp Received Enabled Faxes Disabled NOTE When sending an analog fax select Include Thumbnail to receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification Use this option to add the date time sender s phone number and page number to each page of the faxes that this product receives ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 153 Table 2 19 Fax Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fit to Page Enabled Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Disabled Letter size or A4 size so that they can fit onto a Letter size or A4 size page If this feature set to Disabled faxes larger than Letter or A4 will flow across multiple page
315. tioning If it is not replace the lifter drive assembly 5 If the error persists replace the lifter drive assembly 62 00 00 No system To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an internal system failure Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Reload the firmware 3 Perform a firmware upgrade 4 Ifthe error persists replace the hard disk 69 11 YY Error To continue touch OK Description This message displays to indicate an error during a duplex operation Recommended action Turn the product off and then on 70 00 00 Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a DC controller failure Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Ifthe error persists replace the DC controller 81 WX 00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on 220 Description A wireless network component on the product has failed Recommended action 1 Turn the product off and then on 2 Turn the product off reseat the wireless network component and then turn the product on 3 If the error persists replace the wireless network component Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 81 WX YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error e 81 01 00 event code EIO Networking Event lt UVWXYZ gt o 81 02 00 event code Wireless Networking
316. tive to a VoIP environment The following are suggested changes in settings for the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 when it is connected to a VoIP service e Begin with the fax speed set in Fast V 34 mode and with Error Correction Mode ECM turned on The V 34 protocol handles any changes in transmission speed needed to accommodate VoIP networks e If numerous errors or retries occur with the fax speed set to Fast set it to Medium V 17 e If errors and retries persist set the fax speed to Slow V 29 because some VolP systems cannot handle the higher signal rates associated with fax e In rare cases if errors persist turn off ECM on the product The image quality might decrease Ensure that the image quality is acceptable with ECM off before using this setting e Ifthe preceding setting changes have not improved the VolP fax reliability contact your VolP provider for help ENWW Solve fax problems 317 Problem Incoming fax calls are not being answered by the fax accessory no fax detected Problems with receiving faxes Cause The rings to answer setting might not be set correctly Solution Check the rings to answer setting The fax cable might not be connected correctly or the fax cable is not working Check the installation Make sure you are using the fax cable that came with the product or with the fax accessory The phone line might not be working If you are using a PBX system the
317. trol in the initial rotation period Abnormal low temperature o If the main thermistor detects an abnormal low temperature of the fuser unit during the printing operation o If the sub thermistor detects an abnormal low temperature of the fuser unit during the printing operation e Abnormal high temperature o If the main thermistor detects an abnormal high temperature of the fuser unit o If the sub thermistor detects an abnormal high temperature of the fuser unit e Frequency detection circuit failure o If a specified frequency of the ZERO CROSSING signal is not detected within a specified period after the product is turned on Engine control system 19 Fuser temperature control The fuser temperature control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater at its targeted temperature The DC controller monitors the FUSER TEMPERATURE FSRTH1 FSRTH2 signals and sends the FUSER HEATER CONTROL FSRD signal according to the detected temperature The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signal so that the heater remains at the targeted temperature Figure 1 12 Fuser heater control circuit Engine controller unit Fuser control circuit DC controller Frequency detection circuit RL1001 Relay control circuit Fuser heater safety circuit Fuser heater control circuit E RL1002 i Fuser film
318. ttings are incorrect 1 Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol Enable it if necessary 2 Reconfigure the network settings if necessary ENWW Solve connectivity problems 305 Service mode functions Service menu The Service menu is PIN protected for added security Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu When you select Service from the list of menus the product prompts you to type an eight digit personal identification number PIN 9 NOTE The product automatically exits the Service menu after about one minute if no items are selected or changed 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button 2 Open the Service menu 3 On the sign in screen select the Service Access Code option from the drop down list 4 Enter the following service access code for this product 05052512 The following menu items appear in the Service menu First level Event Log Second level Description Allows you to print or view the product event log Clear Event Log Use this item to clear the product event log Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Mono Cycle Count The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted not including engine test prints Color Cycle Count The page count that is sto
319. u 163 messages numerical list 186 messages types of 186 Network Settings menu 165 Print Options menu 157 Print Settings menu 155 Reports menu 114 Scan Digital Send Settings menu 130 Service menu 185 Troubleshooting menu 179 troubleshooting tests 95 USB Firmware Upgrade menu 185 conventions document iii copy improve quality 298 Copy Settings menu control panel 122 counterfeit supplies 334 counts 306 color cycle 306 copy pages 307 copy scan 307 document feeder 307 document feeder duplex 307 document feeder simplex 307 flatbed cycle 307 mono cycle 306 page reset 306 refurbish cycle 306 reset after replacing formatter 306 send scan 307 See also pages counts creased paper problem solving 295 crooked pages 294 curled paper problem solving 295 customer support online 341 Index 365 D date codes for firmware 112 manufacture 111 product first used 307 demo page 66 density problem solving 290 developing stage 31 diagnostics component 95 control panel 95 engine 69 LED 66 networks 173 Display Settings menu control panel 158 disposal end of life 349 document conventions iii document feeder jams 263 operations 46 paper feeding problems 287 document feeder count document feeder pages 306 document feeder interval 306 dots problem solving 291 296 dropouts problem solving 292 drum cleaning stage 33 duplexer jams 276 E EIO cards buffer overflow 202 electrical specifications 344 electronic
320. u opens Use the down arrow w button to highlight 3 Administrator and then touch the OK button Use the down arrow w button to highlight 2 Format Disk and then touch the OK button a oY Touch the OK button again Ey NOTE When the 2 Format Disk operation is complete you will need to reload the product firmware 312 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Solve fax problems Checklist for solving fax problems Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax related problems you encounter e Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory This fax accessory has been tested with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specifications Do not substitute another fax cable the analog fax accessory requires an analog fax cable It also requires an analog phone connection e Is the fax phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory Make sure that the phone jack is correctly seated in the outlet Insert the connector into the outlet until it clicks e Is the phone wall jack working properly Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack Can you hear a dial tone and can you make or receive a phone call What type of phone line are you using e Dedicated line A standard analog fax phone line assigned to receive or send faxes 6 NOTE The phone line should be for product fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone devices Examples include alarm
321. u want to run Table 2 13 Component tests Component test Item Control panel display Description message Main motor test M8001 Drum Motor Activates the main motor for 10 seconds Fuser motor test M8002 Fuser Motor Activates the fuser motor for 10 seconds Tray 1 multipurpose tray SLI Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid Activates the Tray 1 pickup solenoid for 10 pickup solenoid test seconds Tray 2 pickup solenoid test SL2 Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid Activates the Tray 3 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds Clutch drive test CLI Feed Roller Clutch Activates the main motor to activate the paper feeder pickup clutch for 10 seconds Scanner motor test Not Laser Scanner Motor Activates the laser scanner motor for 10 applicabl seconds e Tray 3 pickup solenoid test SL3 Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid Activates the Tray 4 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds Tray 4 pickup solenoid test SL3 Tray 4 Pickup Solenoid Activates the Tray 4 cassette pickup solenoid for 10 seconds 1 Tray 3 and Tray 4 both use a SL3 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 97 Diagrams Block diagrams Figure 2 21 Product cross section Description 1 Face down delivery roller Cassette Tray 2 separation pad 2 Fuser film 3 Laser scanner Cassette Tray 2 pickup roller Duplex repickup roller 4 Photosensitive drum Registration roller 5 Toner cartridge Transfer roller
322. uct Initializing scanner please wait Description The product is waiting for the scanner to initialize Recommended action No action is necessary Wait until the Ready message appears on the display Initializing Description The product is starting Recommended action No action is necessary Wait until the Ready message appears on the display Install Black Cartridge Description A supply is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product Recommended action Replace or reinstall the toner cartridge correctly to continue printing Install Fuser Unit Description The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product Recommended action A CAUTION The fuser can be hot while the product is in use Reseat the fuser 232 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Install supplies Description More than one supply is missing or is installed incorrectly o gt 10 00 15 event code Black toner cartridge o 10 23 15 event code Fuser kit Recommended action 1 Touch the OK button to identify which supplies need to be replaced 2 Touch the OK button a second time for more information about the specific supply 3 Insert the supply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated Internal disk device failure To clear touch Clear Description The specified device has failed Recommended action Touch the Clear button to clear the message Internal disk file operation
323. uct control panel alerts you to the situation This section contains a pre troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems e Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure check the following issues e Are supply items within their rated life e Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors NOTE The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step A yes answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step A no answer indicates that more testing is needed Go to the appropriate section in this chapter and follow the instructions there After completing the instructions go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart Table 2 7 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Is the product on and does a readable Follow the power on troubleshooting checks See Power subsyst
324. ue Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 40 00 05 Embedded I O bad transmission To continue touch OK Description The product experienced a temporary printing error The connection between the product and the EIO card in the specified slot has been broken Recommended action Touch the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in Tray lt X gt Description The product detected a different paper size than expected Y Size mismatch Z Source o Y 0 Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected o Y A Detected paper too long o Y B Detected paper too short o Z 1 Tray 1 o Z 2 Tray 2 o Z 3 Tray 3 Recommended action 1 Make sure that the tray is loaded with the correct paper size and that the sliding paper guides are correctly adjusted 2 Use the Tray Bin manual sensor test to verify that the tray paper switch is correctly functioning 3 If the error persists replace the lifter assembly 41 03 YZ Unexpected size in Tray lt X gt To use another tray touch Options ENWW Description The product detected a different paper size than expected Y Size mismatch Z Source o Y 0 Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected o Y A Detected paper too long o Y B Detected paper too short o Z 1 Tray 1 Tools for troubleshooting 203 o Z 2 Z 3 Tray 2 Tray 3 Recommended action 1 2 3 Make sure that the tray is loaded with
325. um 777 Toner acquires a negative charge from the friction that occurs when the developing roller rotates against the developing blade The developing bias is applied to the developing roller to make a potential difference between the developing roller and the photosensitive drum The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the photosensitive drum because the drum surface has a higher potential ENWW Image formation system 31 Transfer stage Step 4 The transfer charging roller to which a DC positive bias is applied imparts a positive charge on the print media When the print media comes in contact with the photosensitive drum the toner is transferred to the print media Figure 1 21 Transfer Photosensitive Transfer roller Transfer bias L rh Step 5 The elasticity of the print media causes its separation from the photosensitive drum A static charge eliminator aids separation by weakening any electrostatic adhesion Figure 1 22 Separation Photosensitive Static charge eliminator Transfer roller Fusing stage Step 6 The DC negative bias applied to the fusing film strengthens the holding force of the toner on the print media and prevents the toner from scattering 32 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW The product uses an on demand fuser method The toner image is permanently affixed to the paper with heat and pressure Figure 1 23 Fusing Fuser heat
326. uous Copy 2 sided Save to Disk Raw Scan 2 sided Mechanical Calibration Continuous Print from USB Automatic Calibrations Disabled Enabled Product resets Restore factory set defaults 1 From the Home screen on the product control panel scroll to and touch the Administration button 2 Open the following menus e General Settings e Restore Factory Settings 3 Select one or more categories of settings from the list and then touch the Reset button Restore the service ID Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter the date is lost Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used The date format is YYDDD Use the following formula to calculate the dates 1 To calculate YY subtract 1990 from the calendar year For instance if the product was first used in 2002 calculate YY as follows 2002 1990 12 YY 12 2 Subtract 1 from 10 October is the tenth month of the year 10 1 9 e Multiply 9 by 30 9 x 30 270 or add 17 to 270 270 17 287 Thus DDD 287 Convert the service ID to an actual date You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows 1 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed 2 Divide DDD by 30 If there is a remainder add 1 to the result This is the month 3 The remain
327. upgrade file gt A firmware installation is already in progress possibly by a remote service application gt A firmware installation is pending o An internal system failure has occurred while doing firmware upgrades e An unknown error occurs while doing firmware upgrades gt The memory is full when the user is doing firmware upgrades o The firmware upgrade file does not support this product o The upgrade file is invalid or corrupted while doing firmware upgrades Tools for troubleshooting 247 Recommended action Refer to the walk up help for each of these error conditions for specific instructions on resolving the error Unsupported drive installed Description A non supported hard drive has been installed The drive is unusable by this product Recommended action Replace the unsupported drive Unsupported supply in use Description A non supported supply has been installed Or the toner cartridge is for a different HP product o 10 00 41 event code Black toner cartridge Recommended action Install the correct supplies for this product See the parts chapter in the service manual for supply part numbers Unsupported supply installed Description The product has one or more HP genuine supplies designed for a different product installed The product will either shut down or slow down unless the user acknowledges the condition Recommended action Touch the OK button to continue Unsupported supply inst
328. uplex pan ENWW Clear jams 277 5 Reinsert Tray 2 6 Open the rear door and push down so it is fully opened to a 90 angle NOTE The rear door has two positions It opens to a 45 angle for the rear output bin and to a 90 angle for clearing jams 7 Remove any jammed paper 278 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 8 Press the front door release button 9 Open the front door 10 Remove the toner cartridge ENWW Clear jams 279 11 Lift the jam access covers and remove any jammed paper 12 Reinsert the toner cartridge 280 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW 13 Close the front door 14 Close the rear door Jam causes and solutions ENWW Jams in the top cover and product cassette Cause The cassette separation pad is worn or deformed Solution Replace the cassette separation pad The cassette pickup roller is worn or deformed Replace the cassette pickup roller Poor contact of the cassette pickup solenoid drive connector Reconnect the connector J1601 The cassette pickup solenoid is defective Replace the cassette pickup solenoid The registration roller is dirty worn or deformed Clean the registration roller if it is dirty The registration assembly is defective e Check the spring of the registration shutter and place it in correct positi
329. upport www hp com support Ij500MFPM525 Download software utilities drivers and electronic www hp com go lj500MFPM525 software information Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www hp com go carepack Register your product www register hp com Customer support 341 342 Appendix A Service and support ENWW B Product specifications e Physical specifications e Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions e Environmental specifications ENWW 343 Physical specifications Table B 1 Physical specifications Product Height Depth Width Weight M525dn 576 mm 22 7 in 547 mm 21 5 in 516 mm 20 3 in 29 7 kg 65 5 lb M525 576 mm 22 7 in 547 mm 21 5 in 517 mm 20 4 in 29 7 kg 65 5 lb Power consumption electrical specifications and acoustic emissions See www hp com go I 500MFPM525_ regulatory for current information A CAUTION Power requirements are based on the country region where the product is sold Do not convert operating voltages This will damage the product and void the product warranty Environmental specifications Table B 2 Operating environment specifications Environment Recommended Allowed Temperature 17 to 25 C 62 6 to 77 F 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F Relative humidity 30 to 70 relative humidity RH 10 to 80 RH Altitude Not applicable O to 3048 m 0 to 10 000 ft 344 Appendix B Product specifications ENWW
330. ut levers to activate the sensor Face down media tray PS4 Photo interruptor Photointerrupter PS4 Output Bin Full Open the rear door to media full sensor WG8 85 19 O00CN Top cover assembly RM1 8516 000CN Top cover assembly about 15 degrees 74 1 Tray 3 and Tray 4 use a PS8008 sensor Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW SW501 Cartridge door switch test Test the cartridge door switch SW501 1 Open the cartridge door to activate the sensor Figure 2 2 Test the cartridge door switch 7 lt 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response make sure that the sensor actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing If necessary replace the cartridge door switch ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 75 PS8001 Rear door sensor test Test the rear door sensor PS8001 1 Open the rear door and then gently pull down on the door and lower the door until it is fully open to activate the sensor Figure 2 3 Test the rear door sensor 1 of 2 Figure 2 4 Test the rear door sensor 2 of 2 2 Check the control panel display for sensor response 3 If there is no response make sure that the sensor actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing If necessary replace the rear door sensor 76 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW PS215 Top Top of Page sensor test Test the Top sensor PS215 1 Open the cartridge door and then remove the toner cartridge 2 Raise the re
331. ware This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software including a license agreement in online documentation The term Software may include i associated media ii a user guide and other printed materials and iii online or electronic documentation collectively User Documentation RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA BY INSTALLING COPYING DOWNLOADING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THIS EULA DO NOT INSTALL DOWNLOAD OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE IF YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA PLEASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER HP PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT 1 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE The Software may include in addition to HP proprietary software HP Software software under licenses from third parties Third Party Software and Third Party License Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License Generally the Third Party License is in a file such as license txt or a readme file You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party L
332. ware currently are executing e The Repository the recovery location If the Active location is damaged or a 3 Partial Clean was performed the product automatically copies over the OS and firmware files from the Repository location and the product recovers If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged or a 2 Format Disk was performed then both locations are gone and the error message 99 09 67 displays on the control panel display The user must upload the firmware to the product in order for it to function again A CAUTION The 2 Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk The operating system firmware files and third party files among other files will be completely lost HP does not recommend this action 310 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW Partial Clean The 3 Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive except for the firmware repository where a backup copy of the firmware file is stored This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to download a firmware upgrade file to return the product to a bootable state Characteristics of a Partial Clean e Customer defined settings third party solutions firmware files and the operating system are deleted e Rebooting the product restores the firmware files from the Repository location but does not restore any customer defined settings e For previous HP products a Hard Disk Initialization is s
333. whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides For example select 1 sided original 2 sided output when the original is printed on one side but you want to make two sided copies Orientation Portrait Specify portrait or landscape orientation and select the way the second sides are printed Portrait orientation means the short edge of the page is along the top Landscape Landscape orientation means the long edge of the page is along the top ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 123 Table 2 17 Copy Settings menu continued First level Second level Third level Values Description 2 Sided Format Book style If you are making two sided copies select a 2 Flip style sided format option Book style original Flip Book style The back side style copy of the original is printed rightside up and the back side of the copy is style copy printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along the left edge Flip style original Book Flip style The back side of the original is printed upside down and the back side of the copy is printed the same way Use this option for originals and copies that are to be bound along the top edge Book style original Flip style copy The back side of the original is printed rightside up but the back side of the copy is printed upside down Use this option when the original is bound along the left edge but you wan
334. y 41 05 YZ Unexpected type in Tray lt X gt To use another tray touch Options ENWW Description The product detected a different paper type than expected and another tray is available for use Y Expected type Z Detected type o Y 0 Unknown Y 1 Normal paper Y 3 LBP transparency Y 4 Glossy paper Y 5 Gloss film Y 6 Non assured transparency Y 7 Heavy paper Y 8 Light paper Y 9 Rough paper Y A Extra heavy glossy paper glossy paper 3 Y B Heavy glossy paper glossy paper 2 Y C Heavy paper 3 Y D Heavy paper 2 Z 1 Normal paper Tools for troubleshooting 205 o Z 3 LBP transparency Z 4 Glossy paper Z 5 Gloss film Z 6 Non assured transparency Z 7 Heavy paper Z 8 Light paper Z 9 Rough paper Z A Extra heavy glossy paper glossy paper 3 B Heavy glossy paper glossy paper 2 Z C Heavy paper 3 Z D Heavy paper 2 Recommended action 1 2 Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated or use another tray if available If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings Clean the paper sensor If the error persists replace the paper pickup assembly 41 WX YZ Error To use another tray touch Options Description A printer error has occurred WX o 02 Beam detected misprint error 06
335. ypted Disk This changes the encryption keys rendering all data unreadable 2 Secure Storage Erase Erases temporary files and job data by overwriting information one or three times 3 Secure Disk Erase Industry standard ATA Secure Erase Overwrites all data on the hard drive 4 Secure File Erase Erases files when jobs finish processing by overwriting them one or three times Appendix C Regulatory information ENWW ENWW Figure C 2 Certificate of Volatility 2 of 2 Type HDD Tape etc Size User Modifiable Function Steps to clear memory Solid State Storage 8 GB X Yes No Stores customer data OS Perform a Part Clean from the Device SSD applications persistent data BIOS menu and temporary data used for processing and system functions User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images Note SSD is standard on CF116A not available on CF117A USB Does the item accept USB input and if so for what purpose i e Print Jobs device firmware updates scan upload XX Yes LC No If Yes please describe below Print jobs HP digitally signed firmware upgrades 3rd party application loading USB ports can be disabled Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device XX Yes No If Yes please describe below Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive RF RFID

LaserJet Enterprise 500 MFP Troubleshooting Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents